You are on page 1of 297

Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Chapter IX
Body and accessories
Contents
9.1 Lighting system and horn...................12
9.1.1 Specification....................................12
9.1.1.1 Fastener torque...........................12
9.1.1.2 Specifications of bulb operation 12
9.1.2 Diagram and wiring diagram........13
9.1.3 Diagram of lamp components........21
9.1.3.1 Mixed headlight assembly, front fog lamp assembly and side turn signal lamp
assembly.......................................................21
9.1.3.2 Rear combined lamp, high-mounted brake lamp and license plate lamp assembly
......................................................................21
9.1.3.3 Interior lighting (front reading lamp assembly and rear interior lamp assembly)
......................................................................22
9.1.3.4 Electric horn................................23
9.1.4 Lighting system diagnosis..............24
9.1.4.1 Diagnostic procedures of brake lamp 24
9.1.4.2 Diagnostic procedures of turn signal lamp 25
9.1.4.3 Diagnostic procedures of license plate lamp assembly 26
9.1.4.4 Diagnostic procedures of lamplet26
9.1.4.5 Diagnostic procedures of headlight27
9.1.4.6 Diagnostic procedures of fog lamp28
9.1.4.7 Diagnostic procedures of frontdoor lamps 28
9.1.4.8 Diagnostic procedures of front reading lamp and rear interior lamp 29
9.1.4.9 Diagnostic procedures of reversing lamp 29
9.1.4.10 Diagnostic information and procedures of electric horn 31
9.1.5 Maintenance guidance....................33
9.1.5.1 How to change the headlight assembly 33
9.1.5.2 How to change passing beam/high beam bulb 33
9.1.5.3 How to change front position lamp/turn light bulb 34
9.1.5.4 How to adjust headlight.............35
9-1
第九章 车身和附件

9.1.5.5 How to change front fog lamp assembly 36


9.1.5.6 How to change front fog assembly bulb 36
9.1.5.7 How to change rear combined lamp assembly 37
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole terminal before operation. Don’t operate it
under live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause personal injury or damage of the
vehicle.。......................................................37
9.1.5.8 How to change the rear combined lamp bulb (turn and reverse lamp) 37
9.1.5.9 How to change the license plate lamp assembly 38
9.1.5.10 How to change the reading lamp assembly 38
9.1.5.11 How to change the reading lamp assembly bulb 39
9.1.5.12 How to change the rear interior lamp assembly 39
9.1.5.13 How to change the rear interior lamp assembly bulb 40
9.1.5.14 How to change the high mounted brake lamp assembly 41
9.1.5.15How to change rear combination lamp 41
9.1.5.16 How to change rear combination lamp bulb 42
9.1.5.17 how to change the door lamp assembly 42
9.1.5.18 how to change the door lamp bulb assembly 43
9.1.5.19 How to change the trunk lamp assembly44
9.1.5.20 How to change the trunk lamp blub assembly 44
9.1.5.21 How to change the mixed headlight assembly switch 44
9.1.5.22 How to change the headlight height adjustment switch and electric back mirror
switch............................................................44
9.1.5.23 How to change the hazard warning switch 45
......................................................................46
9.1.5.24 How to change the horn assembly46
9.2 Wiper system/washer system.............47
9.2.1 Specification....................................47
9.2.1.1 Fastener torque...........................47
9.2.2 Diagram and diagram....................48
9.2.2.1 Circuit diagram...........................48
9.2.3 Diagram of the components...........49

9-2
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.2.3.1 Front windshield wiper assembly49


9.2.3.2 Rear wiper assembly...................50
9.2.3.3 Washer water reservoir and motor 51
9.2.4 Diagnostic program of wiper/washer system 52
9.2.4.1 Wiper and washer do not operate at any location 52
9.2.4.2 Wiper always switching on.........52
9.2.4.3 Washer not operating.................52
9.2.4.4 It does not work only at high speed 53
9.2.4.5 It does not work only at low speed53
9.2.4.6 It does not work only at discontinuous location 53
9.2.4.7 How to check the wiper/washer system 54
9.2.5 Maintenance guidance....................55
9.2.5.1 How to change the front windscreen wiper 55
9.2.5.2 How to change the front wiper support 56
9.2.5.3 How to change the front wiper arm 57
9.2.5.4 How to change the front wiper motor assembly 57
9.2.5.5 How to change the rear wiper motor assembly 58
9.2.5.6 How to change cleaning water tanks and motor 59
9.2.5.7 How to change the washer water reservoir 59
9.2.5.8 How to change front nozzle/hose of the washer 61
1 Open the engine hood...........................61
9.2.5.9 How to change the rear nozzle of the washer 61
9.2.5.10 How to change the wiper/windshield washer 62
9.2.5.11 hwo to change the body controller 63
9.3 Exterior trim part...............................64
9.3.1 Specification....................................64
9.3.1.1 Clearance.....................................64
9.3.2 Maintenance guidance....................65
9.3.2.1 DFSK logo (front).......................65
9.3.2.2 Front eyebrow trim assembly 65
9.3.2.3 Rear eyebrow trim assembly. .65

9-3
第九章 车身和附件

9.3.2.4 DFSK logo (rear).........................66


9.3.2.5 Grid assembly..............................67
9.3.2.6 Middle grid of the front bumper67
9.3.2.7 The lower side panel trim assembly 67
9.3.2.8 Front bumper body.....................68
......................................................................69
......................................................................69
9.3.2.9 Rear bumper body......................69
9.3.2.10 Front bumper support..............71
9.3.2.11 Rear bumper support...............71
9.3.2.12 Engine protection plate......71
9.3.2.13 Luggage rack assembly............72
9.3.2.14 Roof trim..................................72
......................................................................73
9.3.2.16 Backdoor outer handle assembly73
9.3.3 Special tools.....................................74
9.4 Water leakage......................................75
9.4.1 Specification....................................75
9.4.1.1 Recommended materials (water leakage repair) 75
9.4.2 Diagnostic information and program 76
9.4.2.1 Leakage testing of the spray frame 76
9.4.2.2 Local leakage testing...................77
9.4.2.3 Dust leakage.................................78
9.4.3 Maintenance guidance....................79
9.4.3.1 Leakage repair of the body........79
9.4.3.2 Seal strip leakage repair.............79
9.4.3.3 Leakage repair of fixed window 80
9.5 Wind noise...........................................81
9.5.1 Diagnostic information and program 81
9.5.1.1 Noise diagnosis............................81
9.6 Abnormal noise...................................82

9-4
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.6.1 Diagnostic information and program 82


9.6.1.1 Abnormal noise judgment..........82
9.6.1.2 Reappering noise and road testing82
9.6.1.3 Determination of the noise location and reason 83
9.6.1.4 General elimination methods of squeak and kluck 83
9.7 Fixed windows....................................85
9.7.1 How to fix the window.....................85
9.7.1.1 Maintenance guidance.................85
9.7.1.2 Backdoor glass.............................88
9.7.1.3 Rear side window glass...............90
9.7.2 Special tool.......................................91
9.8 Front end of the body.........................91
9.8.1 Specification....................................92
9.8.1.1 Fastener torque...........................92
9.8.1.2 Gap and flatness......................92
......................................................................93
9.8.2 Engine hood.....................................93
9.8.2. How to adjust the engine hood......93
C: Engine hood and fender........................93
9.8.2.3 Engine hood hinge.......................95
9.8.2.4 Engine hood buckle assembly.....96
......................................................................97
9.8.2.5Enigne hood lock assembly......97
9.8.2.6 Engine hood lock control stay cable 97
9.8.2.7 Bumper block on the engine hood side 98
9.8.2.8 Supporting rod of the engine hood (Manual: Right) 99
9.8.2.9 Supporting rod of the engine hood(Pneumatic: right and left sides) 100
....................................................................101
9.8.2.10 Fender.......................................101
9.8.2.11 Front hub trim part................102
9.8.2.12 front mudguard......................102

9-5
第九章 车身和附件

9.8.2.12 Rear hub garnish..................103


9.8.2.13 Dash panel trim part body......104
9.8.2.14 Engine hood insulator.............104
9.8.3 Description and operation............105
9.8.3.1 Lubrication................................105
9.8.3.2 Fastener......................................105
9.8.4 Special tool.....................................105
9.9 Door....................................................106
9.9.1 Specification..................................106
9.9.1.1 Fastener torque.........................106
9.9.1.2 Clearance and flatness..............106
9.9.2 Diagram and wiring diagram......107
9.9.2.1 Electric rear mirror..................107
9.9.2.2 Electric rear mirror..................107
9.9.2.3 Electric window.........................108
....................................................................108
9.9.2.4 Electric window.........................109
9.9.2.5 Central control door lock.........110
9.9.3 Diagram of the components..........111
9.9.3.1 Diagram of the electric window components (cabin) 111
9.9.3.2 Diagram of the electric window components (rear door) 112

.....................................................................112
9.9.3.3 Diagram of the door lock device113
9.9.4 Diagnostic information and program 114
9.9.4.1 Door and window lifter assembly cannot operate 114
9.9.4.2 Window lock not working........115
9.9.4.3 Central door lock system diagnosis (remote controller not working). 115
9.9.4.4 Central control door lock system diagnosis (central control door lock not working)
.....................................................................116
9.9.4.5 Central control door lock system diagnosis(door indicator of the Instrument

9-6
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

cluster does not work).......................116


9.9.5 Maintenance guidance..................117
9.9.5.1 Front door..................................117
9.9.5.2 Rear door...................................119
9.9.5.3 Door lock assembly...................122
9.9.5.4 Door hinge..................................123
9.9.5.5 Door interior handle assembly and stay cable assembly 125
9.9.5.6 Door outer handle.....................126
9.9.5.7 Lock pin assembly.....................128
9.9.5.8 How to adjust the door lock pin assembly 129
9.9.5.9 Door glass outer seal strip........129
9.9.5.10 Door glass interior seal strip. .130
9.9.5.11 Door chute assembly...............131
9.9.5.12 Door seal strip.........................132
9.9.5.13 Door frame seal strip..............132
9.9.5.14 Door outer handle lever..........133
9.9.5.15 Door lock cylinder lever.........134
9.9.5.16 Door lock cylinder...................134
9.9.5.17 Outer rear mirror assembly...135
9.9.5.18 Door adjustment.....................136
9.9.5.19 Waterproof film.......................137
9.9.5.20 Door opening limiter...............138
9.9.5.21 Window lifter assembly..........139
9.9.5.22 Electric window main/subsidiary switch assembly 139
9.9.5.23 Filler cap..................................141
9.9.5.24 Filler cap stay cable................141
....................................................................142
9.9.6 Special tool.....................................142
9.10 Rear-end...........................................143
9.10.1 Specification................................143
9.10.1.1 Fastener torque.......................143

9-7
第九章 车身和附件

9.10.1.2 Clearance and flatness............143


9.10.2 Diagram of body rear-end..........144
9.10.3 Maintenance guidance................145
9.10.3.1 Backdoor..................................145
9.10.3.2 Backdoor adjustment.............147
9.10.3.3 Backdoor hinge........................148
9.10.3.4 Backdoor lock body assembly149
9.10.3.5 Backdoor lock pin assembly...150
9.10.3.6 How to adjust the backdoor lock pin assembly 151
9.10.3.7 How to change the backdoor micro switch 151
....................................................................153
....................................................................153
9.10.3.8 Backdoor supporting rod.......153
....................................................................154
....................................................................154
9.10.3.9 Backdoor supporting ball-head bolt 154
9.10.3.10 Backdoor frame seal strip....155
9.10.3.11 Spoiler assembly.....................155
9.10.4 Special tool...................................157
9.11 Vehicle information....................158
9.11.1Specification..............................158
9.11.1.1 Body's dimension..................158
9.12 Seat..................................................160
9.12.1Specification..............................160
9.12.1.1 Fastener torque....................160
9.12.2Diagram of the components.........161
9.12.2.1 Front-row seat.........................161
9.12.2.2 Fouth / Sixth seat(Five-passenger rear) 162
....................................................................162
9.12.2.3Fouth / Sixth seat(Seven-passenger middle) 163
....................................................................163

9-8
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.12.2.4Rear-row Split seat(Seven-passenger third row seat) 164


9.12.3 Diagnostic information and program 165
9.12.3.1 Mechanical diagnosis of the seat adjuster 165
9.12.4 Maintenance guidance...................166
9.12.4.1 Front-row seat assembly.............166
9.12.4.2 Sixth seat assembly(Five-passenger rear) 166
9.12.4.3 Fourth seat assembly(Five-passenger rear) 167
9.12.4.4 Sixth seat assembly(Seven-passenger mid) 168
9.12.4.5Fourth seat assembly(Seven-passenger mid) 168
....................................................................169
....................................................................169
....................................................................169
9.12.4.6Rear seat assembly.......................169
9.13 Interior trim part............................171
9.13.1Specification..................................171
9.13.1.1 Fastener torque.......................171
9.13.2 Maintenance guidance...................172
9.13.2.1 Interior trim panel of column A 172
9.13.2.2 Interior lower trim panel of column A 173
9.13.2.3 Interior trim panelof the front door173
9.13.2.4 Interior upper trim panel of column B 174
9.13.2.5 Interior lower trim panel of column B 175
9.13.2.6The interior trim panel of rear door 176
9.13.2.8Rear side upper interior trim panel assembly (7 passenger) 179
9.13.2.9Rear side lower interior trim panel (5-passenger) 179
9.13.2.10Rear side lower interior trim panel (Seve-passenger) 181
9.13.2.11 Rear door interiortrim panel181
9.13.2.12Rear door frameupper interior trim panel 182
9.13.2.13 Rear door frame column interior trim 184
9.13.2.14 Front door threshold.........185
9.13.2.15 Back door threshold..........185

9-9
第九章 车身和附件

9.13.2.16 Back door threshold..........187


9.13.2.17Trunk (with lorry kit)............187
9.13.2.18Trunk (without luggage kit)188
9.13.2.19 Roof lining........................189
9.13.2.20 The sun visor assembly.........190
9.13.2.21 Safety handle......................190
9.13.2.22 Interior rear view mirrors. 191
9.13.2.23 Carpet........................................191
9.13.3 Special tools.................................193
9.14 Instrument panel, combined instrument and central shroud 194
9.14.1Specification..................................194
9.14.1.1 Fastener torque.......................194
9.14.2 Diagram and wiring diagram....195
9.14.2.1 Basic principle of instrument 195
9.14.2.2 Comfort, luxury, intelligent instrument schematics 196
9.14.3 Part location map....................200
9.14.3.1 Instrument panel.....................200
9.14.3.2 Combination instrument......201
9.14.3.3 Middle shroud.........................202
9.14.4Diagnostic information and program 203
9.14.4.1parking indicator keeping lit up/not working203
9.14.4.2 ABS indicator keeping lit up/not working 203
9.14.4.3 Safety airbag indicator keeping lit up/not working 204
9.14.4.4Safety belt warning lamp keeping lit up/not working 204
9.14.4.5Oil pressure lamp keeping lit up/not working 204
9.14.4.6Engine fault lamp keeping lit up/not working 205
9.14.4.7 Charge indicator keeping lit up/not working 205
9.14.4.8Left and right turn signal.........206
9.14.4.9Front fog lamp instrument indicator not lit up 206
9.14.4.10Rear fog lamp indicator not lit up207
9.14.4.11Passing beam and high beam instrument indicator not lit up 207

9-10
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.14.4.12 Instrument backlight not lit up207


9.14.4.13 Speed meter/odometer not working 208
9.14.4.14Fuel meter does not operate...208
9.14.4.15Water temperature not working209
9.14.4.16 Speedometer not working.....209
9.14.5 Maintenance guidance................210
9.14.5.1 Combined instrument.............210
9.14.5.2 Combined switch upper/lower cover 210
9.14.5.3 12V car power supply..........211
9.14.5.4 Cigarette lighter assembly......212
9.14.5.5 Tool box assembly...................213
....................................................................214
....................................................................214
....................................................................214
9.14.5.6 Side air outlet assembly..........214
9.14.5.7 Central air outlet assembly........214
9.14.5.8 Middle shroud.........................215
9.14.5.9 Danger alarm switch...........216
9.14.5.10 Instrument panel assembly. .217
9.14.5.11 Control cabinet cover...........218
9.14.5.12 Connecting plate of the control cabinet 218
....................................................................219
....................................................................219
....................................................................219
9.14.5.13 Left/right end cover of the instrument panel 219
9.14.5.14 Lower guard plate of the steering wheel 219
9.14.5.15 Side defroster door................219
....................................................................220
....................................................................220
9.14.5.16 Safety airbag cover...............220
9.14.5.17 Tool box guard plate.............220

9-11
第九章 车身和附件

9.14.5.18 Shift mechanism large panel assembly and shift mechanism cover 220
9.14.5.19Switch mounting plate assembly221
9.15 Amusement system.........................223
9.15.1Specification..................................223
9.15.1.1 Fastener torque specification. 223
9.15.2Diagram and wiring diagram......223
9.15.2.1 Diagram of the radio/acoustic system 223
9.15.3 Acoustic system...........................224
9.15.3.1 Diagram of the acoustic system assembly components224
9.15.4Diagnostic information and program 229
9.15.4.1 Diagnostic system operation of radio/acoustic system 229
9.15.4.2 Poor reception effect of the radio229
9.15.4.3 Radio displays not working....230
9.15.4.4 Radio control panel backlight not working 230
9.15.4.5 Radio memory not operating. 230
9.15.4.6 General diagnosis of the loudspeaker 232
9.15.5Maintenance guidance..................233
9.15.5.1 How to change the high pitch loudspeaker 233
1 RemoveInterior trim panel of column A assembly . See “Interior trim panel of
column A assembly”..............................233
3 Install Interior trim panel of column A assembly . See “Interior trim panel
of column A assembly”........................233
9.15.5.2 How to change the front door loudspeaker 233
9.15.5.3 How to change MP5................234
9.15.5.4 Antennas and feeders..........235
9.15.6 Description and troubleshooting of the keys 237
9.15.6.1 Radio + MP3 player with USB interface 237
9.15.6.2 MP5 player (if any).................238
9.16 Wiring system..................................240
9.16.1Diagnostic information and steps 240
9.16.1.1 How to find the circuit............240

9-12
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.16.2Diagram and wiring diagram......258


9.16.2.1Description and operation........258
9.16.2.2 General information...............258
9.16.2.3 Diagram and distribution diagram 259
9.16.3 Fuse box.......................................270
9.17Data link communication.................274
9.17.1Diagram and wiring diagram......274
9.17.1.1 Wiring diagram of data link joint circuit 274
9.17.1.2 Diagram of connection terminals of the data link 275
9.17.2 Location diagram of the components 275
9.17.2.1 Data link communication components 275
9.17.2.2 Diagram of the data link connectors 276
9.17.3 The trouble diagnostic instrument not connected with the power supply
....................................................................276
9.17.3.1 Description of the circuit........276
9.17.3.2 Experimental description.......276
9.17.3.3 Trouble diagnostic instrument not energized 276
9.17.4 Description and operation..........277
9.17.4.1 Description of the data link communication277
9.17.4.2 Description of the data link communication circuit 277
9.17.4.3 Diagnostic start point..............277
9.18 Body Control System (BCM)........278
9.18.1 specification............................278
9.18.1.1 Fastening Fastening Specification 278
9.18.2Diagram and wiring diagram......278
9.18.2.1 Diagram of the circuit.............278
....................................................................278
....................................................................280
9.18.3Location diagram of the components281
9.18.3.1 Position of BCM....................282
9.18.4Description and operation............283

9-13
第九章 车身和附件

9.18.4.1Description of the system functions 283


9.18.5 Maintenance guidance...................286
9.18.5.1 BCM change................................286
9.19 Anti-collision radar.........................287
9.19.1Diagram.........................................287
9.19.2 Location diagram of the components 290
9.19.2.1 System arrangement...............290
....................................................................290
9.19.2.2 AVM controller assembly....290
AVM controller assembly......................290
9.19.2.3 Sensor assembly......................291
9.19.3Trouble diagnosis..........................291
9.19.3.1 Self-check of the anti-collision radar system 291
9.19.3.3 Obstacle detection...................291
9.19.3.4 Regular trouble check.............291
9.19.3.5 List of troubles of the anti-collision radar system 292
9.19.4 Trouble diagnostic procedures of the anti-collision radar system 293
9.19.4.1 Anti-collision radar device not giving out sound 293
9.19.4.2The system giving out “Beep” for four times during self-check 293
9.19.4.3 Anti-collision radar device giving out sound continuously 294
9.19.4.4Anti-collision radar device not reflecting correct obstacle distance 294
9.19.4.5Anti-collision radar device giving out sound without obstacle 295
....................................................................296
9.19.5Maintenance guidance....................296
9.19.5.1Replacement of AVM controller assembly 296
Disassembly procedures...........................296
9.19.5.2 How to change the sensor assembly 296
9.19.5.3 MP5 replacement....................296
9.19.6Description and operation............297
9.20 Skylights........................................298
9.20.1 specification............................298

9-14
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.20.1.1 Fastener torque....................298


9.20.2 Schematic and circuit diagrams298
....................................................................298
....................................................................298
9.20.3Component view............................299
9.20.3.1 Skylight assembly................299
....................................................................299
....................................................................300
....................................................................300
9.20.4Service Guide..............................300
9.20.4.1 Skylight assembly replacement 300
9.20.4Skylight symptoms and diagnostic procedures and repair order 301
9.20.5Maintenance and maintenance of electric sunroof 301
9.21 ESP system......................................303
9.21.1 specification............................303
9.21.1.1 Fastener torque....................303
9.21.2 Schematic and circuit diagrams303
9.21.3 ESP system fault diagnosis procedures 304
9.21.3.1 Keyless entry system does not work 304
9.21.3.2 Keyless start system does not work304
9.22 Electrical system diagnostic code list305
9.22.1 Subsystem Diagnostic Code..........305

9-15
第九章 车身和附件

9.1 Lighting system and horn


9.1.1 Specification
9.1.1.1 Fastener torque
Type
Bolt: (N·m) Screw: (N·m)
Location

Mixed headlight assembly 4~5 -


Front fog lamp assembly - 2~3
Rear combined lamp assembl
y
4~5 -
Door signal lamp switch
assembly - 4~5
Loudspeaker assembly 9~12 -
High-mounted brake lamp
assembly - 2~3
Interior lamp 4~5 -
Combined switch assembly 4~5 -

9.1.1.2 Specifications of bulb operation


Bulb Specifications /type Bulb/lamplight color
Headlight H7/55WorH9/65W White
Front turn signal lamp PY21W Amber
Front position lamp W5W White
Front fog lamp assembly H3/55W White
Side turn signal lamp assembly LED(5W) Amber
Reversing lamp W16W White
Rear fog lamp P21W Red
Rear turn signal lamp PY21W、W21W Amber
Rear position lamp P21/5W、LED(5W) Red
Brake lamp P21/5W、LED(5W) Red
License plate lamp assebly LED(5W) White
Interior dome light W5W、C8W White
High-mounted brake lamp LED(3.6W) Red
Door light C5W White
Rear boot light C10W White

9-16
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.1.2 Diagram and wiring diagram


Vehicle
Chassis CAN
Body CAN

Turn
the
power
/ small RR Foglamp LH Daytime RH Daytime
lights / Relay FR Foglamp Running Running
back Relay Lamp Lamp
light

LH RR RH RR LH RR RH RR
Foglamp Foglamp Foglamp Foglamp

RR RR
Tail Door Tail Door
Bumper Bumper
Lamp LH Lamp RH
Lamp LH Lamp RH
LH FR RH FR Plate
Side Side Lamp
Signal Power
Marker Marker
GND GND
Lamp Lamp

Low High
Beam Beam Head
Head Head Lamp
Lamp Lamp Leveling
Motor
High Ambient
Low Beam Lamp
Beam Head Head Lamp Leveling Power
Head Lamp Switch
Lamp
Gear
LH Head Lamp RH Head Lamp
Combination Combination
LH RH RH
LH Low
High Low High
Beam
Beam Beam Beam
Head
Head Head Head
Lamp
Lamp Lamp Lamp

RR RR To LH RR RH RR
Tail Door Tail Door RH FR RH LH FR LH To Brake
Bumper Bumper Reverse Door Door
Turning Turning Turning Turning Turning Turning Lamp
Turning Turning Lamp Control Control
Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Switch
Signal Signal Switch Switch Switch
Lamp RH Lamp LH Lamp LH Lamp LH Lamp LH Lamp LH
Lamp RH Lamp LH

9-17
第九章 车身和附件

RR Ambient
Bumper Lamp
Brake Power
Lamp

Hazzard
Warning
FR Brake Combination Switch Lamp
Lamp To Brake Switch
Relay Lamp (Reserved)
RR RR
Bumper Bumper Switch
Brake Brake
Lamp LH Lamp RH

To Front
Inner
Lamp 4-
pin

High LH FR RH FR RH FR
Tail Door Tail Door LH RH
Mount Door Door Door Luggage
Brake Brake Courtesy Courtesy
Brake Control Control Control Lamp
Lamp RH Lamp LH Lamp Lamp
Lamp Switch Switch Switch

Brake
Reverse Lamp
Lamp Switch

Reverse Brake
To
Lamp Lamp
Courtesy
Switch Switch
Lamp /
Luggage LH FR RH FR
Lamp RR Inner Makeup Makeup
Lamp Mirror Mirror
Lamp Lamp
FR Inner
Lamp

LH RR RH RR
Reverse Reverse
Lamp Lamp

To BCM
D21-pin
Auxiliary
To ECU To ECU
Brake
25-pin 23-pin
Signal

9-18
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories
Vehicle
Chassis
Body
CAN
CAN

Buzzer

Horn
Relay
Horn (High Pitch)

Horn (Low Pitch)

Clock Spring

Horn
Switch
Signal Power
GND GND

9-19
第九章 车身和附件

Brake pedal
Hazard warning
switch
Front fog lamps

Combination light Combination light


switch 1 switch 2 Cigarette lighter

Rear combination Front fog light


lamp switch
Headlight

Rear dome light Front dome light Small mirror light License Plate Light

9-20
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Cabin wiring harness connector

Cab wiring harness

Chassis harness connector

Cabin room wiring harness

9-21
第九章 车身和附件

Cabin wiring harness


connector

Cab wiring harness

Cab wiring harness


Roof wiring harness

9-22
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Left front door Instrumentation


harness wiring harness

Left front door Instrumentation


harness wiring harness

Left rear door harness Chassis harness Roof wiring harness Back door harness

9-23
第九章 车身和附件

Right rear door harness Chassis harness

Cabin wiring harness Chassis harness

Front cabling harness connector Engine harness connector

9-24
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.1.3 Diagram of lamp components


9.1.3.1 Mixed headlight assembly, front fog lamp assembly and side turn signal lamp
assembly

9.1.3.2 Rear combined lamp, high-mounted brake lamp and license plate lamp
assembly

9-25
第九章 车身和附件

9.1.3.3 Interior lighting (front reading lamp assembly and rear interior lamp
assembly)

9-26
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.1.3.4 Electric horn

9-27
第九章 车身和附件

9.1.4 Lighting system diagnosis


Note: Please check the followings before following diagnostic steps:

1. The vehicle accumulator voltage is normal and incorrectly grounded;


2. The general fuse state is normal.

9.1.4.1 Diagnostic procedures of brake lamp


High-mounted
brake lamp
Measures Yes No
diagnosis (high
configuration)
Check whether the fuse
1 IF1、IF3in the cabin fuse box is Change the fuse. Step 2
fused or not.
Check whether the body
2 controller C18, C25, B6, B15, Step 3 Check repair line
A3, D20 pin is grounded or not
Press brake pedal to see whether
3 the brake lamp bulb is lit up or Step4 Check the bulb
not.
Connect the test lamp with the
two terminals of the brake signal Change the brake
4 Step 5
lamp switch to check whether lamp signal switch
the lamp is lit up or not.
Press the brake pedal and
connect the test lamp with the
Change the brake
5 two terminals of the brake signal Step 6
signal switch.
lamp switch to check whether
the test lamp is lit up or not.
Measure voltage of the
instrument wire harness and roof
wire harness to the both Change the plug and
6 Step 7
terminals of the plug to see fix it tightly.
whether the voltage is decreased
or not.
Measure whether the high-
Change the plug and
7 mounted brake lamp plug is Step 8
fix it tightly.
normal or not.
Measure whether the grounding
8 point of the high-mounted brake Step 9 Ground it properly.
lamp is OV or not.
Check whether the circuit
Change or repair the See “Lighting
9 between the wire harnesses is
wire harness. system”.
short circuit or broken or not.

Brake lamp
Remedies Yes No
diagnosis
Check whether the fuse IF1、IF3in
1 Change the fuse. Step 2
the cabin fuse box is fused or not.
Check whether the body controller
2 C18, C25, B6, B15, A3, D20 pin is Step 3 Check repair line
grounded or not
2 Press brake pedal to see whether the Step4 Check the bulb
9-28
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

brake lamp bulb is lit up or not.


Connect the test lamp with the both
terminals of the brake signal lamp Change the brake
3 Step 5
switch to check whether the test is lit signal switch.
up or not.
Press the brake pedal and connect the
test lamp with the two terminals of Change the brake
4 Step 6
the brake signal lamp switch to check signal switch.
whether the test lamp is lit up or not.
Measure voltage of the instrument
wire harness and chassis wire harness
Change the plug and
5 to the both terminals of the plug to Step 7
fix it tightly.
see whether the voltage is decreased
or not.
Measure whether the brake lamp Change the plug and
6 Step 8
plug is normal or not. fix it tightly
Measure whether the grounding point
7 Step 9 Ground it properly.
of the brake lamp is OV or not.
Check whether the circuit between
Change or repair the See “Lighting
8 the wire harnesses is short circuit or
wire harness. system”.
broken or not.
9.1.4.2 Diagnostic procedures of turn signal lamp
Warning
lamp
Remedies Yes No
switch
diagnosis
Check whether the fuse IF1、IF5n
1 Change the fuse. Step 2
the cabin fuse box is fused or not.
Check whether the body controller
Check repair
2 C18, C25, B6, B15, A3, D20 pin is Step 3
line
grounded or not
Press the alarm switch, test whether Change the
3 switch No. 1 and No. 4 pin is turned The service is completed warning lamp
on or not switch.

Turn
signal
Remedies Yes No
lamp
diagnosis
Check whether the fuse IF1、IF5n
1 Change the fuse. Step 2
the cabin fuse box is fused or not.
Check whether the body controller
Check repair
2 C18, C25, B6, B15, A3, D20 pin is Step 3
line
grounded or not
Set the combined switch assembly to Change the
the left and right shifts respectively to combined
3 Step 4
check whether pin turned on switch
respectively or not. assembly.
Set the ignition switch to “ON” and
set the combined switch assembly to
Change the damaged turn
4 left and right shifts to see whether Step 5
signal lamp.
part of turn signal lamps are lit up at
the left shift or right shift or not.
9-29
第九章 车身和附件

Check whether the connector of the


instrument wire harness and forecabin
Change the
wire harness is in good condition and
5 Step 6 plug and fix it
the connector of the instrument wire
tightly.
harness and chassis wire harness is in
good condition or not.
Check whether the grounding points
Ground it
6 of the turn signal lamp are grounded Step 7
properly.
properly.
Check whether the circuit between
Change or repair the wire See “Lighting
7 the wire harnesses is short circuit or
harness. system”.
broken or not.
9.1.4.3 Diagnostic procedures of license plate lamp assembly

License
Remedies Yes No
plate lamp
Check whether the fuse IF1、IF5n
1 Change the fuse. Step 2
the cabin fuse box is fused or not.
Check whether the body controller
Check repair
2 C18, C25, B6, B15, A3, D20 pin is Step 3
line
grounded or not
Check the license plate
Opening the small light switch plate
lamp assembly connector Step 4
lamp is not lit
and license plate lamp.
Check whether the lamplet switch is Ground it
4 Step 5
grounded properly or not. properly.
Measure whether the connector
between the forecabin wire harness
and instrument wire harness is Change the
5 connected, and the connector between Step 6 plug and fix it
the roof wire harness and instrument tightly.
wire harness is connected correctly or
not.
Measure whether the license plate Change the
6 lamp assembly is connected properly Step 7 plug and fix it
nor not. tightly.
Check whether the license plate lamp Ground it
7 Step 8
assembly is grounded properly or not. properly.
See the
Check whether the wire harness is Change or repair the wire
8 “Lighting
short circuit or broken. harness.
system”.
9.1.4.4 Diagnostic procedures of lamplet
Lamplet Remedies Yes No
Check whether the fuse IF1、IF5n the
1 Change the fuse. Step 2
cabin fuse box is fused or not.
Check whether the body controller C18,
2 C25, B6, B15, A3, D20 pin is grounded Step 3 Check repair line
or not
Check whether the
When opening the lamplet switches, one
3 lamplet connector Step 4
of them is not lit up.
is turned on or not
4 All of them are lit up. Check whether pin Step 5
1and pin 4 of the

9-30
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

combined switch
assembly are turned
on or not.
Check whether the lamplet switch is Ground it
5 Step 6
grounded properly or not. properly.
Measure the connector between the
6 forecabin and chassis wire harness is Step 7 Change the plug
connected properly or not. and fix it tightly.
Measure whether the connector of the Fix the plug
7 front and rear combined headlight is Step 8 tightly or change
corrected correctly or not. it.
Check whether the grounding point of
Ground it
8 the front and rear combined headlights is Step 9
properly.
correct or not.
See the
Check whether the wire harness is short Change or repair
9 “Lighting
circuit or broken or not. the wire harness.
system”.
9.1.4.5 Diagnostic procedures of headlight
Headlight
Remedies Yes No
steps
Check whether the fuse IF1、F5、
1 F9、F16 the cabin fuse box is fused or Change the fuse. Step 2
not.
Check whether the body controller
2 C18、C25、B6、B15、A3、D20 pin is Step 3 Check repair line
grounded or not
Check whether the high beam (passing
3 Step 4 Change relay.
beam) is turned on normally or not.
When setting the ignition switch to
“ON” and setting the combined switch
4 assembly to high beam (passing beam), Change the bulb. Step 6
only one high beam (passing beam) is lit
up.
Check whether pin
1 and pin 4 of the
5 All the bulbs are not lit up. combined switch Step 6
are turned on or
not.
Check whether the passing beam (high
Ground it
6 beam) switch is grounded properly or Step 7
properly.
not.
Measure the connector of the forecabin Fix the plug
7 wire harness and instrument wire Step 8 tightly or change
harness is connected correctly. it.
Fix the plug
Measure whether the mixed headlight
8 Step 9 tightly or change
assembly is connected correctly or not.
it.
Check whether the mixed headlight Ground it
9 Step 10
assembly is grounded correctly or not. properly.
See the
Check whether the wire harness is short Change or repair
10 “Lighting
circuit or broken or not. the wire harness.
system”.
9.1.4.6 Diagnostic procedures of fog lamp

9-31
第九章 车身和附件

Front fog
assembly Remedies Yes No
diagnosis
Check whether the fuse IF1、F11 the
1 Change the fuse. Step 2
cabin fuse box is fused or not.
Check whether the body controller
2 C18、C25、B6、B15、A3、D20 pin is Step 3 Check repair line
grounded or not
See “Diagnostic
Set the combined switch assembly to the lamplet
3 position and check whether it is normal or not.
Step 4 procedures of
lamplet”
Check whether the front fog lamp assembly
4 relay in the forecabin fuse box is normal or not.
Step 5 Change relay.
Press the front fog lamp assembly switch if there Change the front fog
5 is only one lit up. lamp assembly.
Step 6
Press the front fog lamp assembly switch. If the
two fog lamps are not lit up, check whether pin
6 1and pin 4of the switch are turned on correctly
Step 7 Change the switch.
or not.
Check connector of the forecabin wire harness Change and repair
7 and instrument wire harness is connected Step 8 the wire harness and
correctly or not. plug.
Measure whether the plug of the left front and
Fix the plug tightly
8 right front fog lamp assembly is in good Step 9
or change the plug.
condition or not.
Check whether the front fog lamp assembly is
9 grounded correctly or not.
Step 10 Ground it properly.
Check whether the wire harness is short circuit Change or repair the See the “Lighting
10 or broken or not. wire harness. system”.

Rear fog lamp


Remedies Yes No
diagnosis
Check whether the fuse IF1、F12the
1 Change the fuse. Step 2
cabin fuse box is fused or not.
Check whether the body controller
2 C18 、 C25 、 B6 、 B15 、 A3 、 D20pin is Step 3 Check repair line
grounded or not
Turn on the rear fog lamp switch. If the rear fog (1)Change the
lamp is not lit up, (1) check whether the rear fog combined switch
3 lamp is normal or not; (2) Check whether pin Step 4 assembly.
1and pin 4of the combined switch assembly are (2) Change the rear
turned no or not. fog lamp.
Check whether the plug of the chassis wire Change and repair
4 harness and instrument wire harness is normal or Step 5 the wire harness and
not. plug.
Measure whether the rear fog lamp plug is Fix the plug tightly
5 normal or not.
Step 6
or change it.
Check whether the rear fog lamp is grounded
6 properly or not.
Step 7 Ground it properly.
Check whether the wire harness is short circuit Change or repair the See the “Lighting
7 or broken or not. wire harness. system”.
9.1.4.7 Diagnostic procedures of frontdoor lamps
frontdoor lamp
Remedies Yes No
diagnosis
Check whether the fuse IF1、IF4
1 Change the fuse. Step 2
he cabin fuse box is fused or not.
2 Check whether the body controller Step 3 Check repair line
C18 、 C25、 B6 、 B15 、 A3 、 D20pin is

9-32
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

grounded or not
Change the front
Check whether the front reading lamp and rear reading lamp
interior lamp assembly bulb are in good assembly.
3 condition, and the reading lamp connector is
Step 4
Change the rear
connected correctly or not. interior lamp
assembly.
When opening the front door and rear door,
connect the test lamp with pin 2 and pin 3 of the Change the front
4 lamp assembly connector and check whether the reading lamp
Step 5
test lamp is lit up or not.
Check whether the connector of forecabin wire
harness and instrument wire harness is in good
Change the plug and
5 condition, and the connector of the roof wire Step 6
fix it tightly.
harness and instrument wire harness is in good
condition or not.
When opening the door, use the test lamp to
Check the door
6 measure whether the door switch is turned on or Step 7
switch.
not.
Check whether the wire harness is short circuit Change or repair the See “Lighting
7 or broken or not. wire harness. system”.
9.1.4.8 Diagnostic procedures of front reading lamp and rear interior lamp
Front and rear
reading lamp Remedies Yes No
diagnosis
Check whether the fuse IF1、IF4
1 Change the fuse. Step 2
he cabin fuse box is fused or not.
Check whether the body controller
2 C18 、 C25、 B6 、 B15 、 A3 、 D20pin is Step 3 Check repair line
grounded or not
Check whether the lamp assembly bulb
Change the bulb
is in good condition and the reading
3 Step 4 and fix the plug
lamp connector is connected correctly or
tightly.
not.
Change the front
Connect the test lamp with pin 2 and pin
reading lamp
3 of the front reading lamp and rear
assembly.
4 interior lamp assembly connector to Step 5
Change the rear
check whether the test lamp is lit up or
interior lamp
not.
assembly.
Check whether the connector of
forecabin wire harness and instrument
wire harness is in good condition, and Change the plug
5 Step 6
the connector of the roof wire harness and fix it tightly.
and instrument wire harness is in good
condition or not.
Check whether the lamp assembly is Ground it
6 Step 7
grounded correctly or not. properly.
Check whether the wire harness is short Change or repair See “Lighting
7
circuit or broken or not. the wire harness. system”.

9.1.4.9 Diagnostic procedures of reversing lamp

Reversing
Remedies Yes No
lamp diagnosis
1 Check whether fuse F15n the cabin fuse Change the fuse. Step 2

9-33
第九章 车身和附件

box is broken or not.


Check whether the reversing bulb is in
2 Step 3 Charge the bulb.
good condition or not.
Check whether the reversing lamp is in
good condition. When not being
Check the reversing
3 engaged in reverse gear, connect the test Step 4
lamp switch.
lamp to the both terminals of the switch
to see whether the bulb is lit up or not.
When being engaged in the reverse gear,
connect the test lamp to the both Change the
4 Step 5
terminals of the switch to see whether reverse switch.
the bulb is lit up or not.
Check whether the reversing lamp
5 Step 6 Fix it tightly.
connector is in good condition or not.
Check whether the reversing lamp is Ground it
6 Step 7
grounded correctly or not. properly.
Check whether the wire harness is short Change or repair See “Lighting
7
circuit or broken or not. the wire harness. system”.

9-34
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.1.4.10 Diagnostic information and procedures of electric horn


How to check electric horn system

Electric horn
Remedies Normal result Abnormal result
diagnosis
When pressing the
electric horn button, the
Press the electric horn The electr4ic horn
electric horn button sends
button. does not work.
1 out sound.
Release the electric The electric horn
When releasing the
horn button. sound is abnormal.
electric horn button, the
electric horn stops sound.

Electric horn diagnosis Remedies Yes No


Check whether fuse F4
in the forecabin fuse
1 Step 2 Change the fuse.
box is in good
condition.
Check whether the
Check the horn
electric horn switch is
2 Step 3 switch.
in good condition or
not.
Check whether the
3 electric horn relay is Step 4 Change relay.
turned on or not.
Check whether the
electric horn is
4 Step 5 Ground it properly.
grounded properly or
not.
Check whether the
wire harness is short Change or repair the
5 Step 6
circuit or broken or wire harness.
not.
Check whether the
voltage si achieve the Change the electric
6 Step 8
requirements of sound horn
or not.
Change the electric
7 Horn quality problems Complete overhaul
horn

Abnormal electric horn sound

If the electric horn sound is obviously abnormal, perform the following routine check:
1. Check whether the terminal is connected properly and repair it if necessary.
2. Check the grounding. If it is grounded properly, repair it.
3. Tighten the fixing bolt of the electric horn assembly properly.
4. The electric horn assembly shall not be contacted with any other object, or otherwise,
determine correct position of other object again.
Operate the electric horn to determine whether the condition still exists. If any, perform the following checks:
1. Confirm sound type of the electric horn.

9-35
第九章 车身和附件

1) Low tone
2) Shrill tone
2. If it is obvious low tone, it shows that the current is too high. The electric horn assembly
must be changed. See “How to change electric horn”.
3. If the sound is shrill, it shows that the electric horn contains foreign matter. Disassemble the electric horn
assembly and check whether there is any foreign matter. See “How to change the electric horn”.
1) Disassemble any foreign matter on it and reassemble the electric horn assembly.
2) If there is not any foreign matter or the matter cannot be disassembled, change the electric
horn assembly.

9-36
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative


pole terminal before operation. Don’t operate it
under live condition to avoid short circuit so as to
cause personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
1. Disassemble the front bumper body. See “Front
bumper body” in the “External decorative parts”.
2. Disassemble fixing bolts of the mixed headlight
assembly.
3. Disconnect the electric connecters.
4. Disassemble the mixed headlight assembly.
Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the mixed headlight assembly to the
radiator support.
2. Connect the electric connector.
3. Fix the bolt of the mixed headlight assembly.
4. Assemble the front bumper body. See “Front
bumper body” in the “External decorative parts”.

9.1.5.2 How to change passing


beam/high beam bulb
Disassembly procedures
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
1. Disassemble the mixed headlight assembly. See
“How to change the headlight assembly” in the
“Maintenance guidance”.
2. Rotate and disassemble the lamp cover
counterclockwise.
3 Prize up the pressing plate with flat-edge tool
and disassemble the bulb assembly.
Note: When disassembling the bulb, use
thermal insulation material to wrap the
9.1.5 Maintenance guidance bulb to avoid scald.
9.1.5.1 How to change the headlight
4 Separate the bulb from the plug and
assembly
disassemble the bulb.
Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the bulb.
2. Press the lamp holder with pressing plate tightly.
3. Rotate the lamp cover clockwise.
4. Assemble the mixed front assembly. See
“How to change the headlight assembly” in
the “Maintenance guidance”.

9-37
第九章 车身和附件

9.1.5.3 How to change front position


lamp/turn light bulb
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
1 Disassemble the mixed headlight assembly. See
“How to change headlight assembly” in the
“Maintenance guidance”.
2 Unscrew the bulb counterclockwise.
Note: When disassembling the bulb, use
thermal insulation material to wrap the
bulb to avoid scald.
3 Disassemble the bulb.

Assembly procedures
1 Assemble the bulb into the headlight
assembly
2 Screw the bulb into the mixed headlight
assembly clockwise.
3 Assemble the mixed headlight assembly.
See “How to change the headlight
assembly” in the “Maintenance
guidance”.

9-38
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.1.5.4 How to adjust headlight


It is necessary to meet the following conditions
before adjusting the lamplight:
1 The tire pressure of the vehicle is standard one.
2 It must be on flat road;;
3 There is an occupant or 60Kg object in the cabin.
Adjusting method with the tester:
Align the front part of the vehicle with the
tester. Adjust it according to the testing result.
Adjusting method by manual:
Keep a certain distance from the front part of the
vehicle to the screen (relative 10m), turn on the light
switch and adjust the beam. When adjusting, use one
lamp for unit adjustment and shade other headlight,
and then rotate the adjustment screw up, down, left
and right to locate the main beam (highest point) at
the specified height. When adjusting the headlight
up, down, left and right, it must be screwed in. If it
needs to be loosened for adjustment, it shall be
loosened completely before adjustment.
Adjustment location of the headlight: For
the vehicle with headlight adjusting device,
the headlight beam may be adjusted
vertically according to the loading condition:
0 = no-load; 1 = medium load; 2 = full load.
This device can also be used to adjust the
beam when beam height of the headlight is
insufficient. See the following table:
Central height
of the beam
Screen
(H is the
Headlight type distance Data: (mm)
mounting
(m)
height of the
headlight)

Passing Left 10 0.75H~0.8H Both sides ≯100


beam
Right 10 0.75H~0.8H Both sides ≯100
Both sides ≯100
High Left 10 0.85H~0.9H
Both sides ≯170
beam
Right 10 0.85H~0.9H Both sides ≯170

9-39
第九章 车身和附件

9.1.5.5 How to change front fog lamp


assembly
Disassembly procedures
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
1. Raise the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the electric connector.
3. Disassemble the fixing bolt of the front fog
assembly.
4. Disassemble the front fog lamp assembly.
Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the fog lamp assembly to the
front bumper body.
2. Fix the bolt of the front fog lamp
assembly.
3. Connect the electric connector.
4. Drop the vehicle.

9.1.5.6 How to change front fog


assembly bulb
Disassembly procedures
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
1. Disconnect the front fog lamp assembly
connector.
2. Disassemble the fixing screw of the front fog lamp
assembly.
3. Disassemble the front fog lamp assembly.
4. Unscrew the lamp cover counterclockwise.
5. Prize up the metal clamp spring with flat-edge tool
and disassemble the bulb assembly.
Note: When disassembling the bulb, use thermal
insulation material to wrap the bulb to avoid scald..
6 Disassemble the bulb from the socket and
disassemble the bulb.
Assembly procedures
1. Assemble the bulb to the holder.
2. Assemble bulb and holder into the front fog lamp
assembly.
3. Assemble the metal clamp ring.
4. Rotate the lamp cover clockwise.
5. Assemble the front fog lamp assembly to the front
bumper body and tighten the fixing bolt of the front
fog lamp assembly.
6. Connect the electric connector of the front fog
lamp assembly.

9-40
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

combined lamp assembly


Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.。
1. Open the backdoor.
2. Disassemble the fixing bolt of the rear combined
lamp assembly.
3. Disconnect the electric connector.
4. Disassemble the rear combined lamp assembly.
Assembly procedures
1.Assemble the rear combined lamp assembly to the
rear part of the vehicle.
2. Connect the electric connector.
3. Fix the rear combined lamp assembly with bolt.
4. Close the backdoor.

9.1.5.8 How to change the rear


combined lamp bulb (turn and reverse
lamp)
Disassembly procedures:
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative
pole terminal before operation. Don’t
operate it under live condition to avoid
short circuit so as to cause personal injury
or damage of the vehicle.
1. Open the backdoor.
2. Disassemble the fixing bolt of the rear
combined lamp assembly.
3. Screw out the holder counterclockwise.
Note: When disassembling the bulb, use thermal
insulation material to wrap the bulb to avoid scald.
4. Screw out the bulb counterclockwise.
5. Disassemble the bulb.
Assembly procedures:
1. Screw in the bulb clockwise.
2. Screw the lamp holder into the combined lamp
assembly.
3. Fix the rear combined lamp assembly with bolt.
4. Close the backdoor。

9.1.5.7 How to change rear

9-41
第九章 车身和附件

plate lamp assembly


Disassembly procedures:
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.。
1 Disassemble the Interior trim sheet of the
backdoor. See “Interior trim sheet of the
backdoor” in the “Interior trim part”
2 Disconnect connector of the license plate lamp.
3 Disassemble the rear license lamp cover
assembly.。
4 Disassemble the license lamp assembly.
Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the license lamp assembly into
the license lamp cover assembly
2 assemble the license plate lamp assembly
3 Connect the electric connector of the backdoor assembly.
4 Assemble the backdoor interior trim board. See “Backdoor
interior trim board” in the “Interior trim part” .
9.1.5.10 How to change the reading
lamp assembly
Disassembly procedures
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
1 Open glasses case。
2 Disassemble the fixing screw of front reading
lamp assembly。
3 Disconnect the electrical connector。
4 Disassemble the front reading lamp assembly。
Assembly procedures:
1 Connect electrical connectors。
2 Assemble the front reading lamp assembly to
the top cover.
3 Fix the screws of the reading lamp assembly
tightly
9.1.5.9 How to change the license

9-42
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

pole terminal before operation. Don’t operate it


under live condition to avoid short circuit so as to
cause personal injury or damage of the vehicle.。
1 Open glasses case。
2 Disassemble the fixing screw of front reading
lamp assembly。
3 Disconnect the electrical connector。
4 Disassemble the front reading lamp assembly。
Note: When disassembling the bulb,
use thermal insulation material to wrap the
bulb to avoid scald.
5 Press the pressing plate slightly and disassemble
the bulb.

Assembly procedures:
1 semble the bulb into the bulb holder
2 Rotating the bulb holder,mounted on the
lamp body
3 Connect the electric connector.
4 Assemble the front reading lamp assembly to
the top cover.
5 Fix the front reading lamp assembly bolt tightly

9.1.5.12 How to change the rear interior


lamp assembly
Disassembly procedures
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.。
1 press spring clip,Disassemble the rear
interior lamp
2 Disconnect the electric connector.。
3 Disassemble the rear interior lamp
assembly。
Assembly procedures:
1 Connect the electric connector.
2 Assemble the rear interior lamp assembly to the
top cover.

9.1.5.11 How to change the reading


lamp assembly bulb
Disassembly procedures
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative
9-43
第九章 车身和附件

9.1.5.13 How to change the rear interior


lamp assembly bulb
Disassembly procedures:
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
1 disassemble the rear interior lamp.disassemble
the lamp cover。
Note: When disassembling the bulb,
use thermal insulation material to wrap the
bulb to avoid scald.
2 disassemble the bulb.

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the lamp。
2 Assemble the lamp cover
3.. Connect the electric connector.
4 Assemble the rear interior lamp
assembly to the top cover.

9.1.5.14 How to change the high


mounted brake lamp assembly
Disassembly procedures:
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
1 Disassemble the rear spoiler。
2 Disassemble bolt of the high mounted brake
lamp assembly.
3 Disconnect the connector of the high mounted
brake lamp assembly.
4 Disassemble the high mounted brake lamp
assembly
Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the high mounted brake lamp
assembly to the rear spoiler.
2 Connect electric connector of the high mounted
9-44
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

brake lamp assembly.


3 Assemble the fixing clamp of the decorative
plate.。
4 Fix the high mounted brake lamp assembly
bolt tightly.

9.1.5.15How to change rear


combination lamp
Disassembly procedures:
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
1 Lift the vehicle
2 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3 Disassemble the rear combination lamp
assembly screws.
4 Disassemble the rear combination lamp
assembly
Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the rear combination lamp
assembly to the rear bumper body.
2 Fix the rear combination lamp assembly
bolt tightly.
3 Connect electric connector
4 Put down the vehicle

9.1.5.16 How to change rear


combination lamp bulb
Disassembly procedures
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
1 Disassemble the rear combination lamp
assembly, see the Service Manual
"Replacing the rear combination lamp
assembly removal procedure"
2 Rotating the bulb holder to disassemble
the harness。
Note: Use insulation materials package
when removing the lamp bulb to avoid
burns.
3 Disassemble the bulb

Assembly procedures:
1 Rotatably mounted lamp.
2 Rotating the bulb holder mounted lamp
body。
9-45
第九章 车身和附件

3 Connect electric connector


4 Fix the bolt tightly.

9.1.5.17 how to change the door lamp


assembly
Disassembly procedures
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative
pole terminal before operation. Don’t
operate it under live condition to avoid
short circuit so as to cause personal injury
or damage of the vehicle.
1 Using a flat edged tool to pry out lamp
assembly。
2 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3 Disassemble the door lamp assembly.

Assembly procedures:
1 connect the electrical connectors
2 Assemble lamp assembly

9.1.5.18 how to change the door lamp


bulb assembly
Disassembly procedures
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
1 Using a flat edged tool to pry out lamp
assembly。
Note: Use insulation materials package
when removing the lamp bulb to avoid
burns.
2 Disassemble the bulb

assembly procedures
1 Assemble the bulb
2 assemble the door lamp assembly

9-46
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.1.5.19 How to change the trunk


lamp assembly
Disassembly procedures:
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
1 Using a flat edged tool to pry out
trunklamp assembly
2 Disconnect the electrical connectors.。
3 Disassemble the trunk lamp assembly

assembly procedures:
1 connect the electrical connectors
2 assemble the trunk lamp assembly。

9.1.5.20 How to change the trunk


lamp blub assembly
Disassembly procedures
Note: Disconnect the accumulator negative pole
terminal before operation. Don’t operate it under
live condition to avoid short circuit so as to cause
personal injury or damage of the vehicle.
3 1 Using a flat edged tool to pry out
trunklamp assembly

Note: Use insulation materials


package when removing the lamp bulb
to avoid burns。
2 Remove the bulb.

Assembly procedures
1 assemble bulb
2 assemble door lamp assembly

9.1.5.21 How to change the mixed


9-47
第九章 车身和附件

headlight assembly switch


Disassembly procedures:
1 Disassemble lower cover of the combined
switch. See “Lower cover of the combined
switch” in the “Instrument panel, combined 9.1.5.22 How to change the headlight
instrument and central protection cover” height adjustment switch and electric back
2 Disconnect connector of the switch. mirror switch
3 Disassemble the mounting bolt of the Disassembly procedures
combined switch assembly. Note: Disconnect negative pole terminal of the
4 Disassemble the mixed headlight assembly accumulator before operation. Don't operate it
switch assembly. under live condition to avoid personal injury and
Assembly procedures: damage of vehicle due to accumulator short circuit.
1. Assemble the mixed headlight 1 Removing the instrument panel left
assembly switch to the steering lower cover assembly。See "dashboard,
column. instrument cluster shroud and central" in
2. Connect the electric connector. the "Dashboard left cover assembly."
3. Fix the mounting bolt of the 2 Disassemble the switch mounting plate fixing
combined switch assembly. screws
4. Assemble the lower cover of the 3 Disconnect the electric connector.
combined switch. See “Lower cover of
the combined switch” in the
4 Disassemble the corresponding switches.
“Instrument panel, combined
Assembly procedures:
instrument and central protection
1 Connect the switch clamp to the mounting plate
cover”.
assembly.
2 Connect the instrument wire harness and
connector of each switch.
3 Tighten switch mounting plate fixing
screws。

9-48
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.1.5.23 How to change the hazard


warning switch
Note: Disconnect negative pole terminal of
the accumulator before operation. Don’t
operate it under live condition to avoid
personal injury and damage of vehicle due to
accumulator short circuit.
1 Disassemble the dashboard center
air vent "reference dashboard center
air vent assembly disassembly."
2 Prize up the hazard warning switch
with flat-edge tool.
3 Disconnect the electric connector.
4 Disassemble the switch.
Assembly procedures:
1 Connect the electric connector.
2 Assemble the hazard warning switch on
the decorative plate at the middle air
outtake.

9-49
第九章 车身和附件

assembly
Disassembly procedures:
Note: Disconnect negative pole terminal of the
accumulator before operation. Don’t operate it
under live condition to avoid personal injury and
damage of vehicle due to accumulator short circuit.
1 Disassemble the electric horn connector with
flat-edge tool.
2 Disassemble the fixing bolt of the electric horn.
3 Disassemble the electric horn assembly.

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the electric horn assembly to the
middle of the crossbar on the tank body.
2 Fix the bolt of the electric horn.
3 Connect the electric horn connector.
9.1.5.24 How to change the horn

9-50
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.2 Wiper system/washer system


9.2.1 Specification
9.2.1.1 Fastener torque

Location
Type Bolt: (N˙m) Nut: (N˙m)

Front wiper arm


assembly - 12.7~17.6

Front wiper motor 8.8~14.7 -


Washer water reservoir
8.8~14.7 8.8~14.7
and motor
Rear wiper motor
assembly 8.8~14.7 -

9-51
第九章 车身和附件

9.2.2 Diagram and diagram


9.2.2.1 Circuit diagram

Rear Wiper Motor Front wiper motor

9-52
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Wash moter Combination Switch

9.2.3 Diagram of the components


9.2.3.1 Front windshield wiper assembly

9-53
第九章 车身和附件

9.2.3.2 Rear wiper assembly

Legend:
1 Backdoor assembly 3. Bolt M6X25
2 Rear wiper motor and support assembly

9-54
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.2.3.3 Washer water reservoir and motor

9-55
第九章 车身和附件

9.2.4 Diagnostic program of wiper/washer system

9.2.4.1 Wiper and washer do not operate at any location

Step Remedies Yes No


Turn the ignition switch to “ON” and check
1 whether fuse IF1 、 IF8 、 IF9 connected Step 2 Change the fuse.
correctly or not.
Check pin C18 、 C25 、B6 、 B15 、 A3 、 D20
Check and repair the
2 three-in-one controller is grounded properly or Step 3
circuit.
not.
Check whether pin 1、9 of the wiper switch is
3 Step 4 Repair the circuit.
12V voltage or not.
Check whether combination switch pin 4 is
4 Step 5 Repair the circuit.
grounded or not
use diagnostic to judgmentwhether the Check and repair
5 Step 6
combination switch wire is failure or not the circuit.
Check whether the wiper motor is grounded Repair the grounding
6 Step 7
properly or not. point.
Change the
Check whether the motor and the controller
7 motor or Finish the repair.
are damaged properly.
controller.

9.2.4.2 Wiper always switching on

Step Remedies Yes No


Check whether
the wiper motor
Set the ignition switch to “ON” and check
circuit is
1 whether the wiper switch is turned on under Step 2
contacted with
switching off state or not.
other circuit or
not.
Turn off the wiper switch and measure whether The voltage is 12V.
2 output voltage of pin 6, 8 and 9 of the wiper Step 3 Change the wiper
switch is normal or not. switch.
If the measured
voltage is about 12V,
Turn the wiper switch to “OFF” and measure
check whether the
3 whether voltage of pin 4 of the wiper motor is Step 4
circuit is connected
less than 12V or not.
with other supply
cable.
Check the switch
The repair is
4 Whether the voltage is close to OV or not? in the wiper is
finished.
normal or not.

9.2.4.3 Washer not operating

Step Remedies Yes No


Turn the ignition switch to “ON” and check whether
1 fuse IF8 、 IF9 in the fuse box of the instrument Step 2 Change the fuse.
panel is normal or not.
use diagnostic to judgmentwhether the combination Check the
2 Step 3
switch wire is failure or not circuit.
9-56
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Turn the washer switch to “ON” Check whether the


Check the wiper
3 combination switch No. 1, No. 9 pin voltage is Step 4
switch.
normal or not
check whether the body controller B16, A7 pin
Check the circuit and
4 before and after the wash motor wiring harness Step 5
plug.
connector well or not
5 Check whether the motor is normal. Step 6 Change the motor.
Check whether the
Check whether the motor is grounded properly or Finish the
6 circuit is short circuit
not. repair.
or broken or not.

9.2.4.4 It does not work only at high speed

Step Remedies Yes No

Turn on the ignition switch to “ON” and set the wiper switch
Check the
1 to “HI” to check whether voltage of pin 8 of the wiper switch Step 2
switch.
is normal or not.

Check the circuit and wire harness connector between pin 8 of Check the
2 Step 3
the wiper switch and pin 9 of the three-in-one controller. circuit and plug.

Change
2 Check whether the wiper motor is normal or not. Step 4
the motor.

9.2.4.5 It does not work only at low speed


Step Remedies Yes No

Turn on the ignition switch to “ON” and set


the wiper switch to “HI” to check whether
1 Step 2 Check the switch.
voltage of pin 8 of the wiper switch is normal
or not.
Check the circuit and wire harness connector
Check the circuit and
2 between pin 8 of the wiper switch and pin 9 of Step 3
plug.
the three-in-one controller.

Check whether the wiper motor is normal or Change


3 Step 4
not. the motor.

9.2.4.6 It does not work only at discontinuous location


Step Remedies Yes No

9-57
第九章 车身和附件

Turn on the ignition switch to “ON” and turn


Change the wiper
1 on the discontinuous location to checkwhether Step 2
switch.
the switch is normal or not
Check the wiper switch number +2 Pin and
Check and repair the
2 body controller Pin No. B19 the lines and Step 3
circuit.
harness connector
Check the body controller voltage pin number
The repair is Change the three-in-
3 B19 whether intermittent
finished. on controller.
12V or not

9.2.4.7 How to check the wiper/washer system

Step Remedies Normal result Abnormal result

Turn on the ignition switch to


The wiper sweeps the
“ON” and the wiper switch to The wiper does not
1 windshield for one time at
inching (MIST). Release it to reset work.
low speed.
automatically.

The wiper does not


work.
Turn on the ignition switch to
The wiper sweeps the Sweeping speed of the
2 “ON” and wiper switch to
windshield at 4s interval. wiper is not normal.
discontinuous (INT) location.
The wiper cannot
reset.

The wiper does not


work.
Set the ignition switch to “ON” and The wiper cannot
The wiper operates at low
3 the wiper switch to low speed reset.
speed continuously.
“LO”. Sweeping speed of the
wiper is not normal.

The wiper does not


work.
Set the ignition switch to “ON” and
The wiper operates at high Sweeping speed of the
4 the wiper switch to high speed
speed continuously. wiper is not normal/
“HI”.
The wiper cannot
reset.

9-58
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

The wiper blade does


The wiper returns to the stop not stop.
5 Set the wiper switch to (OFF).
location as low speed. The wiper cannot
reset.

The wiper cannot


The sprayer sprays water and
Set the ignition switch to “ON” and spray water and the
6 the switch stops spraying
turn on the sprinkler switch. spray pressure is not
water after reset.
sufficient.

9.2.5 Maintenance guidance


9.2.5.1 How to change the front
windscreen wiper
Disassembly procedures:
1. Turn up the wiper arm.
2. Prize up fixing end of the wiper and pull out the
wiper brush from the support.

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the wiper into the wiper support along
the groove.
2. Put down the wiper arm.
3. Check connecting degree of the wiper and the
windshield.

9-59
第九章 车身和附件

9.2.5.2 How to change the front wiper


support
Disassembly procedures:
Note: Confirm the lower dead center before
disassembling and assembling the wiper.
1 Disassemble the front wiper brush
bracket. See "Maintenance Guide" in the
" How to change the Front Wiper brush
holder."
2 Peel off the front wiper arm fixing
nut decorative cover.
3 Loosen the front wiper arm fixing nut.
4 Disassemble the wiper support.

Assembly procedures:
Note: Confirm the lower dead center before
disassembling and assembling the wiper.
1. Assemble the front wiper arm to the shaft.
2. Fix the front wiper arm with nut.
3. Assemble the nut cover.
4. Assemble the front wiper arm support. See “How
to change the front wiper support” in the
“Maintenance guidance”.

9.2.5.3 How to change the front wiper


arm
Disassembly procedures:
Note: Confirm the lower dead center before
disassembling and assembling the wiper.
1 Disassemble the front wiper support. See “How to
change the front wiper support” in the “Maintenance
guidance”.
2 Open the fixing nut cover of the front wiper arm.
3 Unscrew the fixing nut of the front wiper.
4. Disassemble the front wiper arm.

9-60
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Assembly procedures:
Note: Confirm the lower dead center before
disassembling and assembling the wiper.
1. Assemble the front wiper arm to the shaft.
2. Fix the front wiper arm with nut.
3. Assemble the nut cover.
4. Assemble the front wiper arm support. See “How
to change the front wiper support” in the
“Maintenance guidance”.

9.2.5.4 How to change the front wiper


motor assembly
1. Disassemble the wiper arm. See “How to change
the wiper arm” in the “Wiper system/washer system.
2. Disassemble the front shield plate trim part
assembly.
3. Disconnect the wiper motor and connecting rod
coupling end.
4. Disconnect the wiper motor connector.
5. Disassemble fixing bolt of the wiper motor.
6. Disassemble the front wiper motor assembly.

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the front wiper motor assembly.
2. Assemble and fix the mounting bolts of the motor
assembly tightly.
3. Connect the electric connector of the motor.
4. Turn on the wiper switch to discontinuous location
and turn off the ignition switch when the motor is at
the discontinuous location.
5. Confirm the front wiper arm at the initial location.
6. Connect the front wiper arm connecting rod with
the motor crank.
7. Assemble the front cover trim part assembly.
8. Assemble the wiper arm.

9-61
第九章 车身和附件

9.2.5.5 How to change the rear wiper


motor assembly
Disassembly procedures:
1 Disassemble the rear wiper arm. See “How to
change the wiper arm” in the “Maintenance
guidance”.
2 Disassemble the decorative cover,
rear wiper motor waterproof apron nut
and rubber ring.
3 Disassemble the backdoor trim panel. See
“Backdoor trim panel” in the “Interior trim
part”.
4 Disconnect the wiper motor connector.
5 Disassemble fixing bolt of the wiper motor.
6 Disassemble the rear wiper motor and support
assembly.

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the rear wiper motor to the
backdoor.
2 Assemble and fix the fixing bolts of the rear
wiper motor.
3 successively load the rubber ring,
rear wiper motor waterproof apron nuts
and decorative cover
4 Connect the wiper motor connector.
5 Assemble the backdoor trim panel. See
“Backdoor trim panel” in the “Interior trim part”6
Assemble the rear wiper arm. See “How to
change the rear wiper arm” in the “Maintenance
guidance”.

9.2.5.6 How to change cleaning


water tanks and motor
Disassembly procedures
1. Disassemble the front bumper body. See “Front
bumper body” in the “Exterior trim”.
Note: Disconnect negative pole terminal of
the accumulator before operation. Don’t
operate it under live condition to avoid personal
injury and damage of vehicle caused by
accumulator short circuit.
2. Disassemble connector of the washer water
reservoir motor.
3. Pull out the motor from the washer water
reservoir seal ring.
4. Disassemble the washer water reservoir motor.

9-62
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the motor on the washer water
reservoir.
2. Assemble the motor into the seal ring.
3. Connect the electric connector of the washer
water reservoir motor.
4. Assemble the front bumper body. See “Front
bumper body” in the “Exterior trim”.
9.2.5.7 How to change the washer
water reservoir
Disassembly procedures:
1. Disassemble the front bumper body. See “Front
bumper body” in the “Exterior trip part”.
Note: Disconnect negative pole terminal of
the accumulator before operation. Don't operate
it under live condition to avoid personal injury
and damage of vehicle caused by accumulator
short circuit.
2. Disassemble the electric connector of the
washer water reservoir.
3. Disassemble the washer water reservoir motor.
4. Disassemble fixing bolts of the washer water
reservoir.
5. Disassemble the washer water reservoir.

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the washer water reservoir to the
body.
2. Fix the washer water reservoir with bolt.
3. Assemble the washer water reservoir motor on
the washer water reservoir.
4. Connect the electric connector of the washer
water reservoir.
5. Assemble the front bumper body. See “Front
bumper body” in the “Exterior trim part”.

9-63
第九章 车身和附件

9.2.5.8 How to change front


nozzle/hose of the washer
Disassembly procedures
1 Open the engine hood.
Disassemble the front cover plate
trim body
2 Disconnect the hose from the water outlet of
the washer water reservoir.
3 Disconnect the hose from the nozzle.
4 Disassemble the Front nozzle from the
cover plate garnish
5 Disassemble the washer hose.

Assembly procedures:
1. Connect the hose to the washer water reservoir
water outlet.
2. Fix the washer hose.
3. Assemble the front nozzle to the engine hood.
4. Connect the house to the nozzle.
5. Close the engine hood.

9.2.5.9 How to change the rear nozzle


of the washer
Disassembly procedures:
Disassembly tool: Plastic flat-edge tool
1. Dissemble the high mounted brake lamp. See
“How to change the high mounted brake lamp
assembly”.
2. Disassemble the rear nozzle from the high
mounted brake lamp with flat-edge tool.
3. Disassemble the rear nozzle of the washer.

9-64
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

1. Connect the washer hose to the nozzle.


2. Assemble the nozzle to the high mounted brake
lamp.
3. Assemble the high mounted brake lamp.

9.2.5.10 How to change the


wiper/windshield washer
Disassembly procedures:
1. Disassemble lower cover of the combined
switch. See “Lower cover of the combined
switch” in the “Instrument panel, combined
instrument panel and central protection cover”.
2. Disconnect the switch connector.
3. Disassemble the front wiper/windshield washer
switch assembly.

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the switch to the steering column.
2. Assemble the electric connecter.
3. Assemble lower cover of the combined switch.
See “Lower cover of the combined switch” in the
“Instrument panel, combined instrument panel
and central protection cover”.

Assembly procedures:

9-65
第九章 车身和附件

Disassembly procedures:
1 Disassemble the instrument panel in
the control panel; then disassemble the
MP3 / MP5.
2 Use a screwdriver to unscrew the
fixing bolt body controller.
3 Unplug the plug body controller,
disassemble the body controller。

Assembly procedures:

1 Assemble the plug of body


controller。
2 With a screwdriver fixing bolts
9.2.5.11 hwo to change the body fixing the body of the controller.
controller 3 Assemble MP3 / MP4, and then loaded
on the dashboard control panel

9-66
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.3 Exterior trim part


9.3.1 Specification
9.3.1.1 Clearance
Description
Application Clearance size (mm)

Mixed headlight assembly and front bumper body 2.0±1.0


Mixed headlight assembly and grid assembly 2.0±1.0
Grid assembly and front bumper body 0.0~0.5
Front bumper body and fender 0~1
Front fog lamp assembly and front bumper middle grid 1.0~1.5
Side exterior panel (hub section) and rear bumper body 0~1
Rear bumper body and (vertical) backdoor hinged assembly 8.0±2
Rear bumper body and (horizontal) backdoor hinged assembly 5.0±1
Rear combined lamp assembly and rear bumper body 2.0±1.0

9-67
第九章 车身和附件

9.3.2.1 DFSK logo (front)


Disassembly procedures:
1 Disassemble the front bumper assembly.
See "Front bumper body"。
2 Removing screws of the grille logo
3 Prize up and disassemble the logo from
the grid body with flat-edge tool.
4 Disassemble the logo.
Assembly procedures:
1 Disassemble the lined paper on the back of logo,
and paste the hole to the front grid and use even
force to press the logo surface to ensure firm pasting.

9.3.2.2 Front eyebrow trim assembly


Disassembly procedures:
1 use snap fasteners and screws removing
the front eyebrow trim
2 Disassemble the front fender. See
"front fender."
3 Prize up and disassemble the front eyebrow
trim from the edge with flat-edge tool.
Assembly procedures:
1 The front of the eyebrow trim
inserted into the front bumper and the
lower portion of the side panels, align the
mounting holes, and use uniform force
pressing the front eyebrow trim surface to
ensure that it is firmly snap
2 Use buckle and screws to fix the front
eyebrow trim to the front bumper and the
fender.

9.3.2.3 Rear eyebrow trim assembly


Disassembly procedures:
1 use snap fasteners and screws removing
the front eyebrow trim
Assembly procedures:
1 The front of the eyebrow trim
inserted into the front bumper and the
lower portion of the side panels, align the
mounting holes, and use uniform force
pressing the front eyebrow trim surface to
9.3.2 Maintenance guidance ensure that it is firmly snap

9-68
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Special tools: Heat gun and wedge-shape crow plate


1. When changing the name plate, see the following
steps:
1) Use tape to protect the mounting surface before
disassembly.
2. Disassemble it with wedge-shape crow plate to
avoid damage of paint surface.
3) Before disassembling the name plate, use the
heat gun to heat the logo at 152mm from the surface.
4) Heat it for about 30s circularly.
2. Prize up and disassemble the logo from the
surface with wedge-shape crow plate.

This area is protective


glue

Assembly procedures:
Note: Paste the logo without any dust or other
foreign matter, which may cause uneven pasting of
the logo or loss of pasting capacity.
1. Clean the mounting area of the backdoor panel.
1) Clean the surface with non-woven fabrics with
naphtha or isopropyl alcohol and water (1:1)
solution.
2) Dry the area completely.
2 Heat the surface to about 27℃ ~ 41℃ and the
back face of the logo to about 29℃~32℃.
3 Disassemble the lined paper on the back of the
logo and paste the logo on the marked location, and
press the logo surface with even force to ensure firm
pasting.
4 Disassemble the protective tape from the surface.

9.3.2.4 DFSK logo (rear)


Disassembly procedures:
9-69
第九章 车身和附件

Then splitthe beam trim assemble a snap of


grille and tank
3 First disassemble the front bumper assembly,
then split front bumper and grille body mounting
screws,pull the bumper grille assembly from the
slot.
4 Disassemble the grid assembly.
Assembly procedures:
1 Insert the locking pin of the grid assembly into
the front bumper assembly groove.
2 Assemble and fix the grid body screw.
3 First assemble the tank garnish and
snap, and then assembleed on the front
headlight trim
4 Close the engine hood assembly.
9.3.2.6 Middle grid of the front bumper
Disassembly procedures:
1. Disassemble the front bumper body. See “Front
bumper body”.
2. Disassemble the fixing screw of the middle grid
of the front bumper.
3. Push out the grid from the front bumper body
groove.
4. Disassemble the middle grid of the front bumper.
Assembly procedures:
1. Fix the middle grid of the front bumper on the
front bumper body.
2. Insert the locating pin into the hole of the grid.
3. Assemble and fix the middle grid screw of the
front bumper.
4. Assemble the front bumper body. See “Front
bumper body”.
9.3.2.7 The lower side panel trim
assembly
Disassembly procedures:
1 Disassemble the front fender, see
"front fender"
2 Disassemble the mounting screw and
snap of the rear wheel hub trim and
Side panel trim
3 Disassemble the lower garnish picture
snap, Pull out the lower part of the side
panel trim, Rotation remaining on the side
panels of waterproof snap and removed.
Assembly procedures:
1 Use primary and secondary positioning
column decorative the snap on the side
panels
9.3.2.5 Grid assembly 2 。 Assemble garnish trim screws and
1 Disassembly procedures: snap, Assemble front fender See "front
2 Open the engine hood. fender"
3 first Disassemble the front headlight trim,

9-70
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

screw on the front bumper support assembly


4 Disassemble the nut fixed on the left and right
front columns of the forecabin.
5 Disassemble the self-tapping screw fixed on the
both sides of the front bumper body.
6 Disassemble the bolts on the beam reinforcement
part of the front bumper assembly
7 Disconnect the connector of the front fog lamp (or
daytime running lamp) wire harness. Disassemble
front bumper assembly
8 Disconnect the grid of the front bumper. See “grid
in the front bumper”.
9 Disassemble the front fog lamp assembly See
“Front fog lamp assembly or daytime running lamp”
in the “Lighting system”.
10 Disassemble the middle grid of the front bumper.
See “Middle grid in the front bumper”.
11 Disassemble the front license plate mounting
bracket and front tow hook block cover,

Assembly procedures
1 Assemble the middle grid of the front bumper.
See “Middle grid in the front bumper”.
2 Assemble front license plate mounting
bracket and front tow hook block cover.
3 Assemble grille assembly. See "grille
assembly"
4 Moved the front bumper body to the
front of the body. assemble the front fog
lamp assembly. See "lighting system" in the
"front fog lamp assembly or daytime
running lights."
6 Assemble the front bumper assembly to
the Front bumper support
6 Assemble the front bumper pre-installed
mounting bracket on the front bumper beams
on the tank.
7 Assemble and tighten the nuts on the
front bumper support
8 Assemble and tighten the Self-tapping
screws and the water tank under the
crossbar on the strengthening of the bolt
on the front bumper support
9 Assemble and tighten the water tank
under the crossbar on the strengthening of
9.3.2.8 Front bumper body the bolt
Disassembly procedures on the front bumper support
1 Open the engine hood assembly.
2 Disassemble the headlight trim 10 Assemble the headlight trim assembly
assembly and the tank beams 11 Close the hood assembly and the tank
garnish beams garnish
3 Disassemble the cross recessed pan head

9-71
第九章 车身和附件

1 disassemble the screw hole plug cover


(left/right)and the screw plug cover
support block(left/right) of the bumper
body
2 disassemble the bolt at both ends of
the rear bumper.
3 Disassemble the fixing cross recessed
pan head screw along the upper part of the
rear bumper body.
4 pulled out the rear bumper assembly
from the mounting bracket on both sides,
Disconnect the harness connector of the
front fog lights (or daytime running
lights)
4 Disassemble cross recessed pan head
screws fixing of the rear combination
lamp assembly with rear fog lamps,
5 Disassemble the ultrasonic sensor or
anti-collision radar camera (luxurious
type).
6 Remove the rear bumper body.

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the rear bumper body to the rear part
of the body.
2 Assemble the ultrasonic sensor or anti-collision
radar camera (luxurious type).
3 Assemble and fix the fixing screws of the fog
lamps with the rear combination lamp
assembly See "lighting system" in the "rear fog
light with rear combination lamp assembly
(left) (right)."
4 First patched the rear fog lamp with rear
combination lamp assembly (left), (right) Then
snaps the front bumper assemblyinto the
mounting bracket
5 Assemble and fix the fixing screws on the upper
part of the rear bump body
6 Assemble and fix the fixing screws and Self-
tapping screws on the hub garnishof the rear
bump body lower part
7 Assemble the screw hole plug cover and the
9.3.2.9 Rear bumper body screw plug cover support block) of the bumper
Disassembly procedures: body。

9-72
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.3.2.10 Front bumper support


Disassembly procedures:
1 Disassemble the front bumper body. See “Front
bumper body”.
2 Disassemble the bolts of front bumper
mounting on the supporter.
3 Disassemble the screws of front bumper
mounting on the supporter.
4 Disassemble the front bumper support
Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the front bumper support to
the body.
2 Assemble the bolts of front bumper
mounting on the supporter.
3 Assemble the screws of front bumper
mounting on the supporter.
4 Assemble the front bumper body. See
“Front bumper body”.

Disassembly procedures:
1 Disassemble the rear bumper body. See
“Rear bumper body”.
2 Disassemble the screws of rear bumper
mounting on the supporter.
3 Disassemble the rear bumper support.
Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the rear bumper support to the
body.
2 Assemble the screws of rear bumper
mounting on the supporter.
3 Assemble the rear bumper body. See
“Rear bumper body”.

9.3.2.12 Engine protection plate


Disassembly procedures:
1 Disassemble the snap button and bolts.
2 Disassemble the engine protection plate
Assembly procedures:
1 Assembly engine protection plate to the
support of the engine protection plate.
2 Assemble snap button and bolts.

9.3.2.11 Rear bumper support


9-73
第九章 车身和附件

2. Disassemble middle support cover of the luggage


rack.
3. Disassemble the rear cover of the luggage rack.
4. Disassemble the hexagonal flange nut fixing the
luggage rack.
5. Disassemble the cross recessed pan head screw
fixing the luggage rack.
6. Disassemble the luggage rack assembly.
Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the luggage rack assembly to the top of
the body.
2. Assemble and fix the hexagonal flange nut.
3. Assemble and fix the cross recessed pan head
screw tightly.
4. Assemble front cover of the luggage rack.
5. Assemble the middle support cover of the luggage
rack.
6. Assemble rear cover of the luggage rack.

9.3.2.14 Roof trim


Disassembly procedures:
1 Disassemble the luggage rack assembly.
See "luggage rack assembly."
2 With a flat edged tool to pry open the
car roof trim snaps.
3 Disassemble the cover trim.
Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the roof trim to cover.
2 Assemble the luggage rack assembly. See
"luggage rack assembly."

9.3.2.13 Luggage rack assembly


Disassembly procedures:
1. Disassemble front cover of the luggage rack.
9-74
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.3.2.16 Backdoor outer handle


assembly
Disassembly procedures:
1 Disassemble the backdoor interior trim panel
assembly.
2 Disassemble the bolts of the license plate light
holder.
3 Disassemble the harness connector,Disassemble
the cap support of the license plate lamp
Assembly procedures:
1 assemble electrical harness connector
assembly,corresponding plug cap instal on
the back door;
2 assemble the rear license plate lamp cap
holder to the backdoor
3 assemble the rear license plate lamp
body to support of the rear license plate
lamp.

9.3.3 Special tools


Diagram Tool No./name

9-75
第九章 车身和附件

Wedge-shape crow rod

Heat gun

9-76
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.4 Water leakage


9.4.1 Specification
9.4.1.1 Recommended materials (water leakage repair)

Leakage area Repair material

Bolt, stud, screw and other transition area Adhesive

Fissure and hole (general, smaller) PVC metal adhesive

Broken joint and hole (general, smaller) PVC metal adhesive

Joint (metal) PVC metal adhesive

Rear window Windshield adhesive

Static window Adhesive

Windshield Windshield adhesive

Note: Use equivalent materials if necessary.

9-77
第九章 车身和附件

Spray frame assembly 9.4.2 Diagnostic information and


program
9.4.2.1 Leakage testing of the spray
frame
1. DFSK vehicle is designed for operation under
normal environment condition.
2. The seal strength necessary for natural factor is
considered based on the design principle of the seal
materials and parts. These specifications do not
include all the artificial condition such as pressure
washing.
3. The water leakage testing procedures are related to
the natural factors and depend on performance of the
vehicle under normal operation conditions. The first
step for leakage diagnosis is to determine the
condition of leakage occurrence.
Assemble the spray frame as shown in 4. If general leakage area is found out, it is possible
the diagram to use water pipe or pressure hose to separate the
entering point. Sometimes, the decorative lining
plate or component must be removed in order to
20 repair leakage.
5. Leakage near the door or window does not show
that the seal strip on the door and window is
1 damaged, and can be solved through adjustment of
60° the door.
19 Legend:
1. Pipe
2. Reducing tee joint (only frame on the right side)
3. Pipe joint (only frame on the left side)
2 4. Tee joint (only frame on the left side)
18 5. Four-way joint (only frame on the left side)
3 6. Pipe joint of the pipe and hose (only frame on the
right side)
17
7. Internal threaded hose joint
4 8. Water intake hose (only frame on the right side)
16 5 9. Closed threaded joint
15 6
7 10. Four-way welded cover
14
11. Threaded joint
12. Joint cover
13. Internal threaded hose joint
9 14. Four-way hose
15. House quick joint
8
16. Pipe joint of pipeline and hose
13 10 17. Pipeline
12 11 18. Water pressure gauge (only frame on the right
side)
19. Full-spraying nozzle (NO.1/2GG-25 or equal
product)
20. Joint
Assemble the spray frame as shown in the figure.

9-78
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

1. Determine the frame as shown in the figure.


2. The water spray from the testing frame shall cover
the vehicle as shown in the figure.
3. During testing, appoint an assistant to observe
leakage in the vehicle.
4. Water pressure shall be kept for 3min at 157kPa.
5. When checking the windshield, incline the spray
down at 30° and backward at 45°.
45° 45° 6. Align the water flow with the corner of the
30°
windshield.
7. Check whether the windows on the both sides are
leaked or not. Align the water frame with the center
3200 of the rear side plate down at 30° and backward at
45°.
8. When checking the rear window, incline
the water spray down at 30° and forward at 30°.
30°
45° 45°
Note: Use water hose without nozzle.
Front windshield and Rear window glass and 1. When testing, appoint an assistant to observe it in
A-pillar back door
the vehicle.
2. Testing it from up and down may reduce error.
3. Move the hose slowly and spray water to the
necessary part.

9.4.2.2 Local leakage testing


Note: Before performing repair, firstly
determine the leaked part. Temporary repair for
leakage can only cause more difficult for future
diagnosis and repair.
Local testing can be realized by hose testing
and air hose.

9-79
第九章 车身和附件

Water hose testing applicable for fully-cured adhesive. Damage of the


adhesive may cause increase of leaked points. The
compressed air shall not be more than 205kPa.

9.4.2.3 Dust leakage


Dust may enter vehicle from the non-
leaked part, especially lower part of the vehicle.
Forward movement of the vehicle may cause
light vacuum, which will absorb air and dust into the
vehicle. Determine the leaked location and perform
the following steps:
1. Move the carpet on the floor.
2. Remove all the parts on the floor to expose sheet
metal parts on the bottom as much as possible.
3. Close all the doors and windows.
4. Drive the car on the dust filled with dust.
5. Check internal part of the vehicle. Generally,
there is small circle cone or long seam-shaped dust
at the leaked part.
6. Mark the leaked point.
7. Illuminate the lower side of the floor.
Note: When performing this step, keep the
interior dark in the vehicle.
8. Appoint an assistant to mark the leaked point in
the vehicle.
9. Check the welded part.
10. Check assembly of the body.
11. Seal any leaked part with air drying sealant for
the body.

Air hose testing


Note: Testing by air hose is only

9-80
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

the relevant maintenance guidance.


2. Spray water to the leaked part to determine the
leakage size.
3. Repair and remove the anti-leakage materials and
adhesive material at the leaked part with 75mm ~
100mm irregular edge.
4. Remove the old sealant and clean it at the leaked
part.
5. Check whether there is any obvious or fine
damaged or deformed crack at the area. (If any, the
area shall be used as the key seal area).
6. Apply even new adhesive on the area that the old
sealant and adhesive are removed. When applying it,
it is necessary to cover the original area.
7. Dry the adhesive by air for several hours.
8. Perform leakage testing again to understand the
leakage repair.
9. If there is still problem, repeat the step until the
problem is solved.
10. Assemble the parts around the leaked part. See
the relevant maintenance guidance.

9.4.3.2 Seal strip leakage repair


1. Remove the seal strip at the leaked part. See the
relevant maintenance guidance of the “Seal strip”.
2. Remove dirt and adhesive residue around the seal
strip (if any, apply it).
3. Check whether there is any damaged or deformed
condition around the seal strip frame (if any, repair
or change it). See the relevant maintenance
guidance.
4. Assemble the seal strip. See the relevant
maintenance guidance.
5. Perform leakage testing again to understand the
repair condition.
6. If any, repeat the step until the problem is solved
completely.

9.4.3 Maintenance guidance


9.4.3.1 Leakage repair of the body
1. Remove the parts around the leaked part. See
9-81
第九章 车身和附件

1. Remove the parts around the fixed window. See


the relevant maintenance guidance.
2. Mark the leaked area.
3. Remove old sealant at the exposed area and
remove the dirt.
4. Spray water to the leaked part to determine the
leakage size.

5. Apply new adhesive at the leaked area. Use flat-


edge too to apply the adhesive on the surface and
keep even application.

6. Dry it by air for several hours.


7. Test the leakage again to understand the repair.
8. If there is any leakage, repeat the step until the
problem is solved completely.
9. Assemble the parts around the leaked part. See the
relevant maintenance guidance.

9.4.3.3 Leakage repair of fixed


window
9-82
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Note: Appoint an assistant to drive the vehicle


to avoid personal injury or damage of vehicle.
Determine the air noise location correctly
through testing vehicle. Generally, there is major
leakage source or minor leakage source. If only part
of leakage source is repaired, the noise can be
reduced but not be eliminated.
When testing, the technical person shall bring the
following tools to help find out the wind noise
location.
1. Mechanical echometer or vacuum hose
2. Gummed paper tape
3. Seam seal strip
4. Marking pen
5. Screw driver
Test it according to the following procedures:
1. Select even and straight road to test vehicle in four
directions (east, south, west and north).
2. Select the street with little traffic flow or noise to
avoid affecting testing.
3. Drive the vehicle at the speed with most obvious
noise or drive the vehicle until noise appears.
Note: When testing, forbid the speed more
than the specified speed.
In case the following condition, the wind noise is
external noise:
1. The noise is caused by wind.
2. Wind noise can be heard when the window glass
and speed are decreased.
3. When pasting the tape on the molded part or
clearance, the wind noise disappeared.
4. If the internal wind noise is caused when air
overflows from the vehicle, the repair methods are as
follows:
5. When determining the leakage location, paste the
tape on the relieve valve of the body buckle support
to set up air pressure and enhance wind noise.
6. Find out the leakage location with echometer or
vacuum hose.
7. Repair it with tape temporarily.
8. Test it continuously to determine whether the
noise is eliminated completely or there is other
leakage part or not.

9.5 Wind noise


9.5.1 Diagnostic information
and program
9.5.1.1 Noise diagnosis
9-83
第九章 车身和附件

9.6 Abnormal noise


9.6.1 Diagnostic information
and program
9.6.1.1 Abnormal noise judgment
1. Squeak: (it likes the noise caused by tennis
shoes on clean floor) squeak characteristic
includes slightly touches/fast movement/road
reason/hard surface = high frequency noise/soft
surface = low frequency noise/pavement edge =
chirp.
2. Quack: (it likes the nose when walking on
old wooden floor)
Quack characteristic includes touch/slow 9.6.1.2 Reappering noise and road
movement/rotation warp/noise due to different testing
materials/. Generally, they are produced during If applicable, drive the vehicle with the
operation. customer until the noise appears. Pay attention to
3. Kluck: (It likes the noise caused by child’s other information on the noise condition or location
toy) Kluck characteristic includes fast etc. The information can be used for the same
friction/vibration or similar movement/parts condition reappearing when repairing it.
loosing/clip or buckle loosing/incorrect If the noise is easy to reappear during road
clearance. testing, in order to identify the noise source, stop the
4. Knock: (It likes the noise caused by vehicle and perform the following reappearing
knocking door). operation as much as possible:
Knock characteristic includes noise in empty 1. Close one door.
chamber/echo caused by driving operation 2. Knock or push/pull the area with possible noise.
generally. 3. Quicken engine rotation speed.
5. Tick: (It likes noise caused by clock) 4. Incline the vehicle with jack again.
Tick characteristic includes slight touch among 5. Use engine load at idle speed (electric load, M/T
light materials/parts loosing that may be caused vehicle half-clutch and A/T vehicle driving location).
by driver’s operation or road condition. 6. Raise the vehicle with lifter and knock the tire
6. Wham: (It likes the noise caused by heavy with rubber hammer.
object and silencer) 7. Drive the vehicle to try the noise reappearing as
Wham characteristic includes noise caused by described by the customer.
more slight knock/operation. 8. If the noise is difficult to reappear, drive the
7. Drone: (It likes the noise caused by a large vehicle on uneven or rough road slowly to increase
group of bees). the vehicle load.
Drone characteristic includes high frequency
cackle/stable touch.
8. Generally, acceptable noise level depends on
individual condition. The noise that you
consider acceptable may not be accepted by
other customers.
9. Weather reason especially humidity and
temperature may greatly affect the noise level.

9-84
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.6.1.3 Determination of the noise of squeak and kluck


location and reason See the catalog of disassembly and
1. Reduce the noise range to the specific area installation information of the specified parts
and use hearing tool (engine hearing aid or Instrument panel
mechanical echometer) to help check the noise Most of troubles are caused by touch and
source. movement of the following components:
2. Reduce the noise source to the specific area 1. Column A trim panel and instrument panel
and use the following method to identify the 2. Combined instrument and instrument cover
noise source: assembly
1) Disassemble the parts from the possible area 3. Instrument panel to the windshield
with noise. 4. Fixing pin of the instrument panel
2) Disassemble the clamp or fixer without too 5. Wire harness behind the instrument panel
much force to avoid possible damage or loss of 6. Air conditioner air duct and defrosting pipe
clamp and fixer during repair and new noise. Generally, reappear noise by knocking or moving
3) Knock or push/pull possible parts that may parts or press the parts to stop noise during driving to
cause noise. determine the trouble location. It is possible to use
4) Don't knock or push/pull the parts with too wool fabric adhesive tape or silicone agent to
much force to avoid temporary elimination of eliminate most of troubles (at inaccessible area). It is
the noise. possible to use harness pad to separate the wire
5) Feel whether the parts that may cause noise harness.
are vibrated by hand.
6) Place a paper among the possible parts that Central protection cover and central control
may cause noise. panel
7) Check whether there is any loose part or Pay attention to the following parts:
touch mark. 1. The central protection cover of the instrument
panel
2. The central trim panel to the air
conditioner control panel
3. The wire harness behind the radio player and air
conditioner control panel
4. The steps for repair and separation of the
instrument panel are also applicable for the central
protection cover and central control panel.

9.6.1.4 General elimination methods

9-85
第九章 车身和附件

Door The parts on the engine hood may produce


Note: some interior noise, which may be transmitted to the
1. The trim panel and interior panel that may passenger compartment.
give out slap. The reasons to transmit noise under the engine hood
2. The interior trim panel to the door trim include the followings:
panel 1. Parts mounted on the engine hood
3. Wire harness threads 2. Parts passing through the engine hood
4. The door is not locked completely so as to 3. Support and fixed end of the engine hood
cause the rattat noise reappearing during 4. Radiator fixing pin loosing
starting and parking. Pasting or moving these 5. The bumper body is not aligned in the front of the
parts or pressing them can insulate many engine hood.
troubles. Generally, it is possible to use wool 6. The engine hood lock assembly is not aligned.
fabric adhesive tape or foam block to separate Because these noises may be transmitted to the
these areas to eliminate the noise. interior, it is difficult to separate them. The best
Seat method is to fix, move or separate one part only one
When insulating the seat noise, pay special time. In addition, it is possible to change engine
attention to the seat location and articles on the speed or load to separate the noise, and eliminate the
seat that caused noise. It is necessary to trouble by moving, adjusting, fixing or separating
reproduce these conditions when confirming the parts that cause noises.
and separating the noise source.
The reasons of the seat noise include the
following:
1. Push rod and support of the headrest
2. Squeak between the seat cushion and seat
support
3. Rear-row seat back lock and support
If the noise reappears, it is possible to
press the possible parts to separate the noise. It
is possible to eliminate most of troubles by
rotating the parts or using wire harness at the
touch area.

Engine hood

9-86
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.7.1 How to fix the window


9.7.1.1 Maintenance guidance
Disassembly procedures:
Disassembly tools: Steel wire, awl and
Front windshield small knife
Warning:
1. When machining the glass, use approved goggles
and gloves to avoid personal injury.
2. Appoint an assist to support the front
windshield during disassembly and assembly to
avoid damage of the glass and body and personal
injury.
Note: Before disassembling glass, apply thick
tape around the window frame to protect the
vehicle body.
1. Remove the front wiper. See “How to change the
front wiper” in the “Wiper system/washer system”.
2. Disassemble the trim panel of the dash panel. See
“Trim panel of the dash panel” in the “Front end of
the body”.
3. Remove the interior rear mirror. See “Interior rear
mirror” in the “Interior trim part”.
4. Remove the sun visor assembly. See the “Sun
visor assembly” in the “Interior trim part”.
5. Remove interior trim panel of column A. See
“Interior trim panel” in the “Interior trim part”.
6. Remove the instrument panel. See “Instrument
panel” in the “Instrument panel, combined
instrument panel and central protective cover”.
7 In order to facilitate inserting awl, the awl tip
shall be heated at high temperature.
8 Bore the glass adhesive with awl so that the wire
can pass through it.
9 Cut the adhesive along the glass edge slowly to
approach the wire to the glass as much as possible to
avoid damage of the body.
10 Remove the front windshield.

11 Remove the residue adhesive on the window


frame and front windshield, with cutting depth 1mm
~2mm.

1 、 Knife
2
2 、 glue
3 、 body

9.7 Fixed windows


9-87
第九章 车身和附件

3 Assembly procedures:
Assembly tool: Rubber sucker
Note: Generally, use adhesive (one-component
urethane sealant) and two primers (sometimes one
2
general primer) to change the windshield.
Whichever manufacturer’s primer or adhesive, it
1 must be used by referring to the operation manual
provided by the manufacturer. Not observing the
steps or improper use of the adhesive will affect the
original performance. Before operation, it is
necessary to carefully read the manual and
instructions for the adhesive provided by the
1、Front windshield
manufacturer. During the operation, the operation
2、Front windshield
must be carried out according to the correct
strip
3、Locating Pins methods and steps.
1 Remove the adhesive around the front
windshield and use detergent to clean it and dry
it by air
Apply
primer
2 Apply the windshield seal primer and adhesive
Prim along the window frame.。
brush
er Note: Apply the adhesive from the lower part
clockwise. Thickness on the lower side shall be
Old glue
slightly more than one on the other sides. Mount it
as soon as possible after application.
No primer 4. Apply adhesive on the following range:
1) Width of the upper edge: 12mm
2) Left and right width: 12mm
3) Width of the lower edge: 12mm
5. Fix the rubber sucker on the glass.
6. Assemble the front windshield to the front end of
locating pin the body.
glass cement 7. Check whether there is any clearance between the
adhesive and body or not, and use tape to fix the
glass.
8. Dry it by air for 4 hours or more.
Front windshield Front 9. Perform water leakage testing and check whether
strip windshield there is any leakage.
10. Assemble the sun visor assembly. See “Sun visor
assembly” in the “Interior trim part”.
11. Assemble the rear mirror. See “Interior rear
mirror” in the “Interior trim part”.
12. Assemble the instrument panel. See “Instrument
panel” in the “Instrument panel, combined
instrument panel and central license”.
13. Assemble the interior trim panel of column A.
See the “Interior trim panel of column A” in the
“Interior trim panel”.
14. Assemble the dash panel trim part. See the “Trim
part assembly of the dash panel” in the “Front end of
the body”.
15. Assemble the front wiper arm. See the “How to
change the front wiper arm” in the “Wiper
1 、 Rubber system/washer system”.
sucker

9-88
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.7.1.2 Backdoor glass


Disassembly procedures:
Disassembly tools: Steel wire, awl and small knife
Warning:
Back door 1. When machining the glass, use approved
glass goggles and gloves to avoid personal injury.
2. Appoint an assist to support the front
windshield during disassembly and assembly to
avoid damage of the glass and body and personal
injury.
Note: Before disassembling glass, apply thick
tape around the window frame to protect the
vehicle body.
back door outer trim upper 
part
Back door glass
1 Remove the backdoor interior trim panel
Back door window assembly. See “Rear door glass inner seal strip”
glass seal 2 Remove the spoiler assembly (luxurious type).
Glass See “Spoiler assembly” in the “Rear-end of the
sealant body”.
3 Remove the rear wiper arm assembly. See the
“How to change rear wiper arm” in the
“Wiper/washer system”.
back door inn 4 Disconnecting the rear defrost ground line。
er trim upper 
part
5 In order to facilitate inserting awl, the awl tip
shall be heated at high temperature.
6 Bore the glass adhesive with awl so that the wire
can pass through it.
7 Cut the adhesive along the glass edge slowly to
approach the wire to the glass as much as possible to
avoid damage of the body.
8 Remove the backdoor glass.

1 、 Glue
2 、 Primer
surface

2
1

9-89
第九章 车身和附件

9 Remove the residue adhesive on the Assembly tool: Rubber sucker


window frame and front windshield, with Note: Generally, use adhesive (one-component
cutting depth 1mm ~ 2mm. urethane sealant) and two primers (sometimes one
general primer) to change the windshield.
Whichever manufacturer’s primer or adhesive, it
must be used by referring to the operation manual
provided by the manufacturer. Not observing the
steps or improper use of the adhesive will affect the
original performance. Before operation, it is
necessary to carefully read the manual and
instructions for the adhesive provided by the
manufacturer. During the operation, the operation
must be carried out according to the correct
methods and steps.
1. Remove the adhesive around the backdoor glass
and use detergent to clean it and dry it by air.
2. Apply the windshield seal primer and adhesive
along the window frame.
Note: Apply the adhesive from the lower part
clockwise. Thickness on the lower side shall be
slightly more than one on the other sides. Mount it
as soon as possible after application.
3. Apply adhesive on the following range:
1) Width of the upper edge: 20mm
2) Left and right width: 15mm
3) Width of the lower edge: 18mm
4. Fix the rubber sucker on the glass.
5. Assemble the front windshield to the front end of
the body.
6. Check whether there is any clearance between the
adhesive and body or not, and use tape to fix the
glass.
7. Dry it by air for 4 hours or more.
8. Perform water leakage testing and check whether
there is any leakage.
9. Assemble the rear wiper arm assembly (luxurious
type). See the “How to change rear wiper arm”
in the “Wiper/washer system”.
10. Connect the rear defrosting grounding wire
(luxurious type).
12. Assemble the spoiler assembly (luxurious type).
See “Spoiler assembly” in the “Rear-end of the
body”.
13. Assemble the backdoor interior trim panel. See
“Backdoor interior trip panel” in the “Interior trip
part”.

Assembly procedures:
9-90
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.7.1.3 Rear side window glass


Disassembly procedures:
Note: During disassembly and assembly,
appoint an assistant to support the side window
glass to avoid damage of the glass and body as well
as personal injury.
rear triangular 1 Open the rear door
window 2 Remove the upper interior trim panel of the rear
side wall. See “Interior trim panel (luxurious type)”
Rear triangular
in the “Interior trim part”.
window glass
3 in order to insertion awl, awl tip should be heated
strips
to high temperatures。
4 Use an awl drill holes in the glass glue, so that the
wire can pass through.
5 Along the outer edge of the glass slowly cut
viscose, try to make the wire close to the glass, so as
not to damage the body.
6 Remove the lower rear side window glass.

glue

Locating Assembly procedures:


Pins Special tool:Rubber sucker
Note: Generally, use adhesive (one-component
urethane sealant) and two primers (sometimes one
general primer) to change the windshield.
Whichever manufacturer’s primer or adhesive, it
Rear triangular must be used by referring to the operation manual
window provided by the manufacturer. Not observing the
steps or improper use of the adhesive will affect the
Rear triangular window original performance. Before operation, it is
glass strips necessary to carefully read the manual and
instructions for the adhesive provided by the
manufacturer. During the operation, the operation
must be carried out according to the correct
methods and steps.
1 Open the rear door
2 Remove the adhesive around the backdoor glass
and use detergent to clean it and dry it by air.
3 Apply the windshield seal primer and adhesive
along the window frame.
Note: Apply the adhesive from the lower part
clockwise. Thickness on the lower side shall be
slightly more than one on the other sides. Mount it
as soon as possible after application.

9-91
第九章 车身和附件

between the adhesive and body or not, and use


4 Apply adhesive on the following range: tape to fix the glass.
Spread evenly around the glass : Minimum 8 Dry it by air for 4 hours or more.
12mm. 9 Perform water leakage testing and check
5 Fix the rubber sucker on the glass. whether there is any leakage.
6 Assemble the Rear side window glass to the
end of the body.
7 Check whether there is any clearance

9.7.2 Special tool

Diagram Tool No./name

Rubber sucker

9.8 Front end of the body


9.8.1 Specification
9.8.1.1 Fastener torque
Application Specification (N·m)
Bolt – engine hood assembly lock 7~9
9-92
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Bolt – fender 6~12


Nut – fender 6~12
Bolt—engine hood assembly hinge 23~29
Nut—engine hood assembly hinge 23~29
Bolt—engine hood assembly strut 23~29

9.8.1.2 Gap and flatness


Name
Application Clearance size Parallel tolerance (mm) Flatness tolerance
(mm) (mm)
Engine hood and fender 4.0±2.0 1.0 0±1.0
Engine and grid body 6.0±2.0 1.0 0±1.0
Engine hood and headlight 6.0±1.5 1.0 0±1.0
assembly

9-93
第九章 车身和附件

The engine hood adjustment includes frontal plane


adjustment (only adjusting the clearance vertically)
and turnover plane adjustment (flatness adjustment).
The former can be used to realize longitudinal
clearance adjustment by adjusting the relative
position from the engine hood to front end of the
body. The latter can be used to realize flatness
adjustment by adjusting engine hood bumper block
height.
Note: The adjustment range of the engine
hood shall be in line with the technical
specification provided by the manufacturer strictly.
Authorized adjustment may cause improper
position when the engine hood is closed so as to
damage the parts.

Clearance adjustment:
1 Open the engine hood.
2 Loosen the bolts from the engine hood hinge to
the front end of the body.
3 Adjust the clearance range. See “Clearance and
flatness”.
4 If it needs to be adjusted, see “How to adjust
the engine hood lock”
5 After adjusting it, close the engine hood.

Flatness adjustment
1. Open the engine hood.
2. Unscrew the bumper block clockwise or
counterclockwise to realize adjustment.
3. Adjust the flatness. See “Clearance and flatness”.
4. After adjusting, measure the clearance again and
C check the fitness between the engine hood lock and
A buckle.
B C
B 5. If it needs to be adjusted, see “How to adjust the
engine hood lock”.
6. After adjusting it, close the engine hood.
Note:
A: Engine hood and grid assembly
B: Engine hood and headlight assembly
C: Engine hood and fender

9.8.2 Engine hood


9.8.2. How to adjust the engine hood
9-94
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Warning: During disassembly and assembly,


appoint an assistant to support the engine hood to
avoid possible damage of the vehicle or personal
injury.
Note: Before disassembly and assembly, firstly
arrange the protection pad on the fender and
windshield to avoid damage of the vehicle.
1. Open the engine hood.
2 Remove the engine hood thermal baffle
(comfortable/luxurious type). See “Engine thermal
baffle).
3 Remove the engine hood supporting rod. See
“Engine hood supporting rod”.
4 Remove the engine hood lock. See “Engine hood
lock”.。
5 Remove bolts on the upper part of the engine hood
hinge.
6 Remove the engine hood.

Assembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and assembly,
appoint an assistant to support the engine hood to
avoid possible damage of the vehicle or personal
injury.

Note: Before disassembly and assembly, firstly


arrange the protection pad on the fender and
windshield to avoid damage of the vehicle.
1. Move the engine hood to the front end of the body
and align it with the hole of the hinge for assembly.
2. Assemble the engine hood lock. See “Engine hood
lock”
3 Close the engine hood and check the clearance,
and adjust the engine hood if necessary. See “How to
adjust engine hood”.
4 Assemble and fix the engine hood hinge bolt to
torque 23N·m~29N·m.
5 Assemble supporting rod of the engine hood. See
“Supporting rod of the engine hood”.6 Assemble the
engine hood insulator. See “Engine hood insulator”.
7 Close the engine hood.

9.8.2.2 Disassembly procedures:

9-95
第九章 车身和附件

assembly, appoint an assistant to support the


engine hood to avoid possible damage of the
vehicle or personal injury.
1 Remove the engine hood. See “Engine hood”.
2 Remove the front cover plate trim body. See
"cowl trim body."
3 Remove the bolts from the engine hood hinge to
the body.
4 Remove the hood hinge to the front end of the bolt
body.
5 Remove the engine hood hinge.

Assembly procedures:
1. Align the hole to mount the engine hinge to the
body.
2. Assemble and fix the engine hood hinge to the
body bolt to torque 23 N·m~29 N·m.
3. Assemble the fender. See “Fender”.
4. Assemble the engine hood. See “Engine hood”.
5. Close the engine hood and check clearance, and
adjust the engine hood if necessary. See “How to
adjust the engine hood”.
6. After adjusting, fix the engine hood hinge bolt to
the engine hood to torque 23 N·m~29 N·m.

9.8.2.3 Engine hood hinge


Disassembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and

9-96
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Following inspection or adjustment of the


eigine hood lock is necessary:
1 engine hood not properly open and
close.
2 When the hood is closed, the gap is too
big between the trim.
3 Replacement of the engine hood lock.
4 Replacement or adjustment of the engine
hood。
Assembly procedures:
1 Check whether the water tank is
installed on the hood lock beam impact
caused by deformation or prints.
2 Remove engine cover side buffer block.
See "hood-side buffer block."
3 Slowly closing the hood assembly,
inspection and lock the hood lock
4 If necessary, mark.

Adjustment Program
1 Release the bolts of the engine hood
latch.
2 adjust the position of the lock
according to mark
3 Install the hood side buffer block.
See "hood-side buffer block."
4 Close the hood and check the gap.

9.8.2.4 Engine hood buckle assembly

9-97
第九章 车身和附件

9.8.2.5Enigne hood lock assembly


Disassembly procedures:
1. Open the engine hood.
2 Mark lock position in front of the
vehicle to ensure proper installation.
3 Removing the hood lock bolt。
4 Remove the hood latch assembly

engine hood buckle position. See “How to adjust


the engine hood buckle”.See "hood lock
adjustment."
5 Normally closed check clearance. See
"degree gap and flush."

9.8.2.6 Engine hood lock control stay


cable
Disassembly procedures:
1. Open the engine hood.
2. Remove the engine hood buckle assembly. See
“Engine hood buckle assembly”.
3. Pull out the stay cable ball-head and fixing
clamp from the engine buckle.
4. Unscrew the fixing nut on the handle.
5. Pull out the handle and stay cable.
6. Remove the engine hood control stay cable.

Assembly procedures:
1 According to mark the location of the
installation lock to the front end of
the vehicle body.
2 Assemble and fix the engine hood buckle bolt
to torque 7N.m~9N.m.
3 Check whether the engine hood is closed
normally or not.
4 If it cannot be closed normally, adjust the
9-98
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

of the instrument panel.。


2 Assemble and fix the engine hood lock bolt
to torque 7N.m~9N.m.3
3 Assemble another end of the ball-head of the
stay cable and fix it to the engine hood
buckle.。
4 Assemble the engine hood buckle assembly.
See “Engine hood buckle assembly”.
5 Install the A pillar trim panel (left), see
"Internal Trim" in the " A pillar trim panel."
6 Close the engine hood.

9.8.2.7 Bumper block on the engine


hood side
Disassembly procedures:
1. Open the engine hood assembly.
2. Screw the bumper block from the upper beam
mounted on the water tank.
3. Remove the bumper block of the engine hood
assembly.

turn around
旋转方向

Assembly procedures:
1 Screw in the bumper block on the engine
hood side and check whether the left and
right bumper blocks on same height or not.
2 Close the engine hood assembly and check
whether it can be closed normally or not.
3 If it cannot be closed normally, adjust the
bumper block height again. See “Clearance and
flatness”.

旋转方向 4 Assemble another end of the ball-head


turn around of the stay cable and fix it to the
engine hood buckle.。
5 Assemble the engine hood buckle
assembly. See “Engine hood buckle
assembly”.
Assembly procedures: 6 Close the engine hood.
1 Insert the engine hood stay cable into inner side

9-99
第九章 车身和附件

9.8.2.8 Supporting rod of the engine


hood (Manual: Right)
Disassembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and
assembly, appoint an assistant to support the
engine hood to avoid possible damage of the
vehicle or personal injury.
1. Open the engine hood.
2. Pull out the supporting rod from the fixing
clamp of the engine hood.
3. Remove the supporting rod of the engine hood.

Assembly procedures:

Warning: During disassembly and


assembly, appoint an assistant to support the
engine hood assembly to avoid possible damage
of the vehicle or personal injury.
1. Assemble the supporting rod into the fixing
clamp on the engine hood.
2. Close the engine hood assembly.

9-100
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

sides)
Disassembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and assembly,
appoint an assistant to support the engine hood to
avoid possible damage of the vehicle or personal
injury.
1. Open the engine hood.
2 Remove the ball studs of the bonnet
strut pneumatic
3 Remove two bolts pneumatic pole mount
bracket.
4 Removi pneumatic struts and stent。

Assembly procedures:

Warning: During disassembly and assembly,


appoint an assistant to support the engine hood
assembly to avoid possible damage of the vehicle or
personal injury.
1 Pneumatic struts and front bracket on
the vehicle body, and tighten the bolts to
23 N • m ~ 29 N • m.
2 installed Pneumatic struts in the
engine cover of the ball studs.
3 Close the engine hood assembly.

9.8.2.9 Supporting rod of the engine


hood(Pneumatic: right and left

9-101
第九章 车身和附件

Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the side turn signal lamp. See “Side turn
signal lamp in the “Lighting system”.
2 Remove the front bumper support. See “Front
bumper support” in the “Exterior trim part”.
3Remove the rear fender trim. See
"External Trim" in the "rear fender trim."
4Remove the front bumper bracket. See
"External Trim" in the "front bumper
bracket."
5 Remove the bolt on the lower part of the
fender.
6 Remove the fender.

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the fender to the front end of the body.
2Assemble and tighten the bolts to the
fender 6 N • m ~ 12 N • m. .
3Assemble the front bumper bracket. See
"External Trim" in the "front bumper
bracket."
4 Assemble rear fender trim. See "External
Trim" in the "rear fender trim."
5 Assemble the front bumper support. See
“Front bumper support” in the “Exterior
trim part”.
6 Assemble the front wheel eyebrow trim.
See "External Trim" in the "front eyebrow
trim."

9.8.2.10 Fender
9-102
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.8.2.11 Front hub trim part


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the front hub trim snaps.
2 Remove the front fender, see "front
fender."
3 Remove the screws and bolts on the wheel
hub trim。
4 Remove the front hub trim.

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the front hub trim part into the fender
groove by hole.
2. Assemble and fix the fixing screws of the front
hub trim part.
3. Assemble the fixing clip of the front hub trim part.
4. Assemble the front fender. See “Front fender” in
the “Exterior trim part”.

9.8.2.12 front mudguard


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the snaps of the front mudguard
2 Remove the front mudguard screw and big
washer assemblies.
3 Remove the front mudguar

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the mudguard scrw and big
washer assemlies
2 Assemble the front wheel eyebrow.
3 Assemble the mudguard scrw and big
washer assemlies

9-103
第九章 车身和附件

9.8.2.12 Rear hub garnish


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the snaps of the rear hub trim.
2Remove the screws and bolts of the rear
hub trim
3 Remove the rear hub trim.

Assembly procedures:
1 install the rear hub trim in the rear
pair of holes in the drum kit
2 Install the rear hub garnish retaining
tabs.
3 Install and tighten the front wheel hub
trim screws and bolts.

9-104
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.8.2.13 Dash panel trim part body


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the front wiper. See “Front wiper
arm” in the “Wiper/washer system”.
2 Open the front cabin cover。
3 Remove the sides of the front cover
plate decorative plate.
4 Remove the clamp of the front cover
plate garnish.
5 pull forward and remove out.

Assembly procedures
1 Install the clamp of the front cover
plate garnish.
2 Install on both sides of the front
cowl trim panel.
3 Install the front wiper arm. See
"wiper / washer system" in the "front
wiper arm assembly"。
4 Close the front cabin cover.

9.8.2.14 Engine hood insulator


Disassembly procedures:
Special tool: BD-0001 interior trim buckle crow
plate
1. Open the engine hood assembly.
2. Prize the thermal insulator buckle with
buckle crow plate.
3. Remove the engine hood insulator.
Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the engine hood insulator to
the engine hood.
2. Insert the fixing buckle.
3. Close the engine hood.

9-105
第九章 车身和附件

9.8.3 Description and operation


9.8.3.1 Lubrication
The engine hood assembly hinge and
locking device need to be lubricated regularly to
ensure correct operation. See “General
information” to understand the lubrication type
and time interval.
9.8.3.2 Fastener
The current vehicle is provided with
many aluminum parts. If special surface coating
or insulating protection coat, the aluminum may
be corroded quickly due to contacting with steel.
The fastener has special surface coat that can
provide sufficient anti-corrosion protection. These
fasteners have different colors and are different
from the bright blue standard metric fasteners.
When changing the fasteners, don't change
other similar fasteners.
9.8.3.3 Anti-corrosive material
In order to prevent rusting, the interior
surfaces of most of the metal panels are coated
with anti-corrosive materials. When repairing
these panels, if the original material is affected,
coat the anti-corrosive material for repair.

9.8.4 Special tool

Diagram Tool No./name

Crow plate for


the interior trim
part clip

9.9 Door
9.9.1 Specification
9.9.1.1 Fastener torque

9-106
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Application Specification(N·m)
Bolt – door hinge 16~26
Bolt – door lock assembly 7~9
Bolt – door opening limiter 9~11

9.9.1.2 Clearance and flatness


Name

Application Clearance size Flatness tolerance


(mm) (mm)

Column A and front door 5.3±1.0 6.0±1.0


Fender and outer rear mirror +1.0
4.0±1.0
+0
+1.0
Front door and rear door 4.0±1.0 +0
+1.0
Fender and front door 4.0±1.0
+0
Front door and outer side wall panel
5.3±1.0 6.0±1.0
(upper)
Rear door and outer side wall panel
5.3±1.0 6.0±1.0
(upper part)
+1.0
Rear door and rear side window 4.0±1.0
1.0 +0
+1.0
Rear door and outer side wall panel (rear) 4.0±1.0
+0
Front door and outer side wall panel
6.0±2.0 2.0±1.0
(lower)
Rear door and outer side wall panel 6.0±2.0 2.0±1.0
(lower)

9-107
第九章 车身和附件

9.9.2 Diagram and wiring diagram


9.9.2.1 Electric rear mirror
Vehicle
Chassis CAN
Body CAN
Power
Rearview
Mirror

To BCM
C32-pin

Rearview
Rear
Mirror
Wiper Rearview Mirror Adjustment
Folding
Switch

RH
LH Rearview
Rearview Mirror
Mirror
Up Left Up Left
Down Right Down Right

To
rearview
Outer rearview folding
mirror L switch

Signal Power
GND GND Outer rearview
mirror R

9.9.2.2 Electric rear mirror

Electric rearview mirror Electric rearview mirror switch

9-108
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.9.2.3 Electric window


Vehicle Chassis
Body CAN CAN
Ambient Ambient Ambient
Lamp Lamp Lamp
LH Power RH Power Power Power Power
Windows Windows

LH RR RH FR RH RR
Windows Windows Windows
Lift Lift Lift

Down Up Down Up Down Up

Up Down Up Down Up Down Up Down

Main Power Windows


Switch

Signal Power
GND GND Ambient
LH FR Power RH FR Power LH RR Power RH RR Power Lamp
IMMO Power
Windows Windows Windows Windows
Coil
Regulator Regulator Regulator Regulator

Type A——(without pinch function)

Ambient Ambient Ambient Ambient


Lamp Lamp Lamp Lamp To BCM
Power Power Power Power d6-PIN

LH RR RH FR RH RR Main
Power Power Power Power
Windows Windows Windows Windows
Lift Lift Lift Switch

Down Up Down Up Down Up

Power Windows Jam Protection

Down Up Down Up Down Up Down Up

Signal Power Power


GND GND GND

LH RR Power RH FR Power LH FR Power RH RR Power


Windows Windows Windows Windows
Regulator Regulator Regulator Regulator

Type B—(with pinch function)

9-109
第九章 车身和附件

9.9.2.4 Electric window

To Power Windows Jam Protection To Power Windows Jam Protection


Window anti-clip
Controller PE1 controller PE1 WindowController
anti-clipPE2
controller PE2

Main
MainPower Windows
power Switch
window switch Right front glass lift switch。Right rear glass lift switch、Left rear glass lift switch
RH FR Power Windows Switch, RH RR Power Windows Switch, LH RR Power Windows Switch

9-110
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.9.2.5 Central control door lock


Vehicle Body
Chassis CAN
CAN

Door
Lock LH FR Door Lock
Actuator
IMMO Coil
RH FR Door Lock
Actuator

Key LH RR Door Lock


Insert/Withdraw Actuator
Switch
RH RR Door Lock
Actuator

LH FR RH FR RR and Tail LH RR RH RR
Manual Door Door Door Door Door Tail Door
Central Lock Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Switch
Release Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch
RR and Tail Door
Signal Power Signal Motor
GND GND

9.9.2.6 Central control door lock

Left front door lock

9-111
第九章 车身和附件

9.9.3 Diagram of the components


9.9.3.1 Diagram of the electric window components (cabin)

9-112
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.9.3.2 Diagram of the electric window components (rear door)

9-113
第九章 车身和附件

9.9.3.3 Diagram of the door lock device

9-114
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.9.4 Diagnostic information and program


9.9.4.1 Door and window lifter assembly cannot operate
Step Remedies Yes No
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON”, press left
front electric window switch and observe
1 Step 5 Step 2
whether the window lifter can operate normally
or not.
Check whether the fuse
2 IF11 、 IF12 ( orIF14 、 IF15 、 IF16 ) is Step 3 Change the fuse.
normal or not.
Detection of insurance lines to BCM(Or anti-
trap windows controller) and switch,check
3 Step 4 Maintenance Line
whether the BCM (Or anti-trap windows
controller)Ground line is normal or not
Repair or
replacement the
master power
check the master power window window
switch,BCM(Or anti-trap windows controller), switch,BCM(Or
4 — anti-trap windows
Left front door glass lifter motor is normal or
not controller), Left
front door glass
lifter motor is
normal
Press the main power window switch and the
other door glass elevator button, Observe
5 Step 9 Step 6
whether the corresponding window regulator is
normal or not
Check whether the fuse
6 Step 7 Change the fuse.
IF11(orIF14、IF15)is normal or not.
Detection of insurance lines to BCM(Or anti-
trap windows controller) and switch,check
7 Step 8 Repair Line
whether the BCM (Or anti-trap windows
controller)Ground line is normal or not
Repair or replace the
Check whether the the main power window main power window
8 —
switch, each glass lift motor is normal or not switch, each glass lift
motor
Press each sub power window switch button,
9 Observe whether the door window lifter is — Step 10
working properly or not

Check the wiring and grounding switch is Replace the


10 corresponding Repair Line
normal or not
switch

9.9.4.2 Window lock not working


9-115
第九章 车身和附件

Step Remedies Yes No


Turn on the ignition switch to “ON”, press the
window button and operate other three doors and The repair
1 Step 2
windows to see whether they can operate normally or is finished.
not.
Check whether Power Window Switch is grounded
2 Step 3 Repair line
properly or not.

Check whether the window lock switch button is Repair or replace the
3 —
normal or not switch

9.9.4.3 Central door lock system diagnosis (remote controller not working).

Step Remedies Yes No


Check whether the remote controller battery is Change
1 Step 2
consumed completely or not. battery
1. It gives out “crack”
sound but the turn
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON” and close the
signal lamp cannot be
door with remote controller key to see whether the The repair
2 lit up. See step 6.
turn signal lamp is normal, and whether the door can is finished.
2. It cannot give out
give out “crack” sound when closing or not.
“crack” sound. See
step 3.
Check whether the fuse IF01、IF10 are normal or
3 Step 4 Change the fuse.
not.

check whether IF01/IF05/IF10 to BCM line,BCM


Check wiring and
4 A3/A20/B6/B15/C18/C25 ground, BCM to the door Step 5
grounding
lock motor circuit is normal or not
Replace the fuse, light
Check whether the fuse IF05、each turn signal lamp bulbs, check the line
5 Step 6
and a ground wire is narmal or not short-circuit or open
circuit
Change the See "central locking
Check whether the BCM and the door lock motor BCM and system diagnostics
6
damage or not the door (central locking does
lock motor not work)."

9.9.4.4 Central control door lock system diagnosis (central control door lock not
working)
Step Remedies Yes No

9-116
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Change
Check whether the battery of the remote
1 the Step 2
control is exhausted or not
battery
1. There have the
latch sound turn
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON”, Close the door lights do not
he repair is
2 with the remote control key,, check whether the turn flashing to step 5
finished
signals are working properly or not, 2.There have no
latch sound to
step 3
Check whether the fuse IF01、IF10 are normal or
3 Step 4 Change the fuse.
not.

check whether IF01/IF05/IF10 to BCM line,BCM


Check the circuit and
4 A3/A20/B6/B15/C18/C25 ground, BCM to the door Step 5 grounding
lock motor circuit is normal or not
Replace the fuse, light
Check whether the fuse IF05、each turn signal lamp bulbs, check the line
5 Step 6
and a ground wire is narmal or not short-circuit or open
circuit
Change the See "central locking
Check whether the BCM and the door lock motor BCM and system diagnostics
6
damage or not the door (central locking does
lock motor not work)."

9.9.4.5 Central control door lock system diagnosis ( door indicator of the
Instrument cluster does not work)

Step Remedies Yes No


Insert the ignition switch key and open the left
The repair
1 front door to see whether the combined instrument Step 2
is finished.
door indicator is normal or not.
Check whether fuse IF02、IF18 of the instrument
2 Step 3 Change the fuse.
fuse box is normal or not.
Check whether the body CAN bus lines are
3 Step 4 Check the circuit.
normal or not
Check whether the left front door switch is normal Check the door signal
4 Step 5
or not. lamp switch.
Check whether the
The repair
5 Check whether the grounding is normal or not. circuit is short circuit or
is finished.
broken.

9-117
第九章 车身和附件

9.9.5.1 Front door


Disassembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and
assembly, appoint an assistant to
support the door to avoid possible
damage of the vehicle or personal
injury.
1 Removing the front triangle trim. See
the "front door trim Triangle"。
2 Remove the front door interior trim panel. See
“Front door interior trim panel” in the “Interior trim
part”.
3 Remove the lower outer rear mirror assembly. See
“Outer rear mirror assembly”.
4 Remove the door glass inner seal strip. See
“Door glass outer seal strip”.
5 Remove the door glass outer seal strip. See
“Door glass outer seal strip”.
6 Remove the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.
7 Remove the front door loudspeaker. See “How to
change the front door loudspeaker” in the
“Amusement system”.
8 Turn the window lifter to lift the glass mounting
point to the process hole of the front door interior
panel, remove the glass mounting bolt and the glass
assembly.
9 Remove the window lifter assembly. See “Window
lifter assembly”
10 Remove the door chute assembly. See "Door
chute assembly"
11 Remove the door lock lever. See “Door lock
lever”
12 Remove the door outer handle lever. See “Door
outer handle lever”.。
13 Remove the door outer handle. See “Door outer
handle”.
14 Remove the door lock cylinder. See “Door lock
cylinder”。
15 Remove the door seal strip. See “Door seal
strip”.
16 Removing the door frame angle trim
17 Remove the door glass perimeter seals
18 Disassemble the door from the wire harness
with flat-edge tool.
19 Remove the door opening limiter. See “Door
opening limiter”.
20 Remove the front door
21 Remove the door hinge. See “Door hinge”.
Remove the front door.。
9.9.5 Maintenance guidance

9-118
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

door to avoid possible damage of the vehicle or


personal injury.
1 Assemble the door hinge to the door.
2 Assemble the door opening limiter to the door.
3 Assemble the door hinge to the body. See “Door
hinge”.
4 Assemble the door opening limiter to the body.
See “Door opening limiter”.
5 Assemble the door seal strip. See “Door seal
strip”.
6 Assemble the door lock assembly. See “Door
lock assembly”
7 Close the door and check the clearance and
flatness. See “Clearance and flatness”
8 Check the fit location of the door lock assembly
and lockpin assembly.
9 If the door lockpin assembly needs to be
adjusted, see “Door lockpin assembly adjustment”
10 Insert the wire harness into the front door.
11 Assemble door outer handle. See “Door outer
handle”.
12 Assemble the door outer handle lever. See
“Door outer handle lever”
13 Assemble the door lock cylinder lever. See
“Door lock cylinder lever”
14 Assemble the window lifter assembly. See
“Window lifter assembly”.
15 Assemble the front door rear chute assembly.
See “Door chute assembly”.
16 Assemble the door glass surrounding
strip.
17 Assemble door frame angle trim.
18 Assemble front door glass assembly.
19 Assemble the front door loudspeaker. See “How
to change the front door loudspeaker” in
“Amusement system”.
20 Assemble the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.
21 Assemble the door glass outer seal strip. See
“Door glass outer seal strip”.
22 Assemble the outer rear mirror assembly. See
“Outer rear mirror assembly”.
23 Assemble the front door interior trim panel. See
“Front door interior trim panel” in the “Interior trim
part”.
24 Assemble the door triangle trim. see "the door
triangle trim "

Assembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and
assembly, appoint an assistant to support the
9-119
第九章 车身和附件

assembly, appoint an assistant to support the door


to avoid possible damage of the vehicle or personal
injury.
1 Removing the rear door trim panel assembly. See
"Internal Trim" in the "back door trim panels."
2 Remove the backdoor glass outer seal strip. See
“Door glass outer seal strip”.
3 Remove the glass inner seal strip . See the “ glass
inner seal strip”.
3 Remove the glass outer seal strip . See the “ glass
outer seal strip”.
4 Remove the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.
5 Remove the rear door trim. See "Rear
Door trim"
6 Remove the backdoor loudspeaker (luxurious
type). See “How to change backdoor loudspeaker” in
the “Amusement system”.
7 Turn the window lifter to lift the glass mounting
point to the process hole of the rear door interior
panel, remove the glass mounting bolt and the glass
assembly.
8 Remove the window lifter assembly. See “Window
lifter assembly”.
9 Remove the door outer handle lever. See “Door
outer handle lever”.
10 Remove the rear door chute assembly. See
“Door chute assembly”.
11 Remove the door outer handle. See “Door outer
handle”.
12 Remove the door lock assembly. See “Door lock
assembly”.
13 Remove the door frame angle trim。
14 Remove the door glass surrounding strip.
15 Remove the wire harness from the door with flat-
edge tool.
16 Remove the door opening limiter. See “Door
opening lifter”.。
17 Remove the rear door.
18 Remove the door hinge. See “Door hinge”.

9.9.5.2 Rear door


Disassembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and

9-120
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

assembly, appoint an assistant to support the door


to avoid possible damage of the vehicle or personal
injury.
1 Assemble the door hinge to the rear door.
2 Assemble the limiter to the rear door.
3 Assemble the door to the door hinge
4 Assemble the door opening limiter to the body.
See “Door opening limiter”.
5 Assemble the door seal strip. See “Door seal
strip”.
6 Assemble the door lock assembly. See “Door
lock assembly”.
7 Close the door and check the clearance and
flatness. See “Clearance and flatness”.
8 Check the fit location of the door lock assembly
and lockpin assembly.
9 If the door lockpin assembly needs to be
adjusted, see “Door lockpin assembly adjustment”.
10 Insert the wire harness into the rear door.
11 Assemble the door outer handle. See “Door outer
handle”.。
12 Assemble the door outer handle lever. See
“Door outer handle lever”.
13 Assemble the window lifter assembly. See
“Window lifter assembly”.
14 Assemble the rear door chute assembly. See
“Door chute assembly”
15 Assemble the rear door glass assembly.
16 Assemble door frame angle trim
17 Assembledoor glass assembly.
18 Assemble the rear door trim,see‘rear door trim’
19 Assemble the rear door loudspeaker (luxurious
type). See the “How to change the backdoor
loudspeaker” in the “Amusement system”.
20 Assemble the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.
21 Assemble the rear door glass inner seal strip. See
“Rear door glass inner seal strip”.
22 Assemble the rear door glass outer seal strip. See
“Door glass outer seal strip”
23 Assemble the rear door interior trim panel. See
“Rear interior trim panel”.

Assembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and

9-121
第九章 车身和附件

glass inner seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.


3 Remove the door lock stay cable. See “Door
interior handle assembly and stay cable
assembly”.。
4 Remove the door inward-opening stay cable. See
“Door interior handle assembly and stay cable
assembly”.
5 Remove the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.
6 Remove the door chute assembly. See “Door
chute assembly”。
7 Remove the door lock cylinder lever. See “Door
lock cylinder lever”.
8 Remove the door outer handle lever. See “Door
outer handle lever”.。
9 Disconnect the electric connector
10 Remove the bolts of the door lock assembly
11 Remove the door lock assembly.

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the door lock assembly to the door.
2 Connect the electric connector of the central
control door lock.
3 Assemble and fix the door lock assembly bolt to
7N·m~9N·m.
4 Assemble the door outer handle lever. See “Door
outer handle lever”.
5 Assemble the door lock cylinder lever. See
“Door lock cylinder lever”.
6 Assemble the door chute assembly. See “Door
chute assembly”.
7 Assemble waterproof film. See “Waterproof film”.
8 Assemble the door inward-opening stay cable. See
“Door interior handle assembly and stay cable
assembly”.
9 Assemble the door lock stay cable. See “Door
interior handle assembly and stay cable assembly”.
10 Assemble the door interior trim panel. See
“Front door interior trim panel” or “Rear door glass
inner seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”
11 Remove the front door triangle trim - front
door. See "front door triangle trim"

9.9.5.3 Door lock assembly


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the front door triangle garnish.
see"font door triangle garnish"
2 Remove the door interior trim panel. See
“Front door interior trim panel” or “Rear door

9-122
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

assembly, appoint an assistant to support


the door to avoid possible damage of the
vehicle or personal injury.
1 Disconnect the electric connector of the door
wire harness.
2 Remove the door opening limiter bolt on the
body side.。
3 Mark hinge mounting location on the body。
4 Remove the hinge bolt on the body side。
5 Place the door assembly on the support.
6 Remove the hinge bolt on the door side.
7 Remove the hinge.

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the hinge to the door according to the
marked location.
2. Assemble and fix the hinge bolt on the door side
to torque 16N·m~26N·m.
3. Assemble the door assembly to the body
according to the marked location.
4. Close the door and check the clearance and
flatness. See “Clearance and flatness”.
5. Adjust the clearance and flatness by adjusting the
door and door locking pin assembly.
1) See “Door adjustment”.
2) See “How to adjust the door locking pin
assembly”.
6. Assemble and fix the hinge bolt on the body side
to torque 10N·m~26N·m.
7. Assemble and fix the door opening limiter bolt on
the body side to torque 9N·m~11N·m.
8. Connect the door wire harness connector.

9.9.5.4 Door hinge


Disassembly procedures
Warning: During disassembly and

9-123
第九章 车身和附件

4 Remove the inner handle fixing screw。


5 Remove the door interior handle.
6 Remove the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.
7 Remove the door chute assembly
8 Disassemble the stay cable on the lock side.
9 Remove the inward-opening stay cable and lock
stay cable.

Assembly procedures
1 Connect the inward-opening stay cable and lock
stay cable to the lock block.
2 Fix the stay cable to the door.
3 Assemble the door chute assembly
4 Assemble waterproof film. See “Waterproof film”.
5 Assemble the inward-opening handle to the interior
trim panel.
6 Connect the inward-opening handle to the stay
cable.
7 Assemble the door interior trim panel. See “Front
door interior trim panel” or “Rear door glass inner
seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.
8 Assemble and fix the inward-opening handle screw
to torque 3N·m~5N.m.。
9 Assemble the screw trim cover.
10 Assemble the front door triangle trim - front
door. See "front door triangle trim"

9.9.5.5 Door interior handle


assembly and stay cable assembly
Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the front door triangle trim - front
door. See "front door triangle trim"。
2 Remove the door interior trim panel. See
“Front door interior trim panel” or “Rear door
glass inner seal strip” in the “Interior trim
part”.。
3 Disassemble the interior handle and stay
cable with flat-edge tool.

9-124
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

film”.
8 Assemble the door interior trim panel. See “Front
door interior trim panel” or “Rear door glass inner
seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.。

9.9.5.6 Door outer handle


Disassembly procedures:
1 Lift the window glass to the top.
2 Remove the front door triangle trim - front
door. See "front door triangle trim"。
3 Remove the door interior trim panel. See
“Front door interior trim panel” or “Rear door
glass inner seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.
4 Remove the waterproof film. See
“Waterproof film”.
5 Disassemble the door outer handle and lever.
6 Tear off the rubber cover of the door handle
bolt。
7 Remove the door outer handle.。
8 Remove the door trim from the door handle。
9 Remove the door handles。
10 Remove the door handle bracket.

Assembly procedures
1 Assemble the door outer handle to the door.
2 Assemble the door handle to the bracket.
3 Assemble the door trim to the door
4 Assemble and fix the door outer handle bolt
to torque 4N·m~5N·m.
5 Assemble the door outer handle bolt rubber
cover
6 Connect the lever to the door outer handle.
7 Assemble waterproof film. See “Waterproof

9-125
第九章 车身和附件

9 Assemble the front door triangle trim - front


door. See "front door triangle trim"

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the lock pin assembly to the body.
2. Close the door and check the clearance and
flatness. See “Clearance and flatness”.
3. Adjust the door and door lock pin assembly by
adjusting the clearance and flatness.
1) See “Door adjustment”.
2) See “How to adjust the door lock pin assembly”.
4. Assemble and fix the bolt to torque 11N·m ~
13N·m.

9.9.5.7 Lock pin assembly


Disassembly procedures:
1. Remove the fixing bolt of the lock pin
assembly.
2. Remove the door lock pin assembly.。

9-126
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

assembly:
1. The door is impacted by huge external force.
2. The door cannot be opened or closed normally.
3. The door is changed.
4. The door hinge is changed.
5. The door lock pin assembly is changed.
Check procedures:
1. Confirm the door clearance and flatness within the
specified range.
2. Check the fit location of the lock block and lock
pin.
3. If necessary, apply suitable amount of paint with
color mark on the opening of the lock block.
4. Close the door to ensure the lock pin assembly is
adjusted.
5. Check the marked location on the lock pin
assembly.
Adjustment procedures:
1. Loose the door lock pin assembly bolt to ensure
the lock pin assembly can be adjusted.
2. Adjust it suitably according to the marked
location.
3. Assemble and fix the door lock pin assembly bolt.
4. Close the door after adjusting it.

9.9.5.9 Door glass outer seal strip


Disassembly procedures:
1. Remove the door glass outer seal strip screws.
2. Drop the glass to the lower dead center.
3. Remove the door glass outer seal strip.

9.9.5.8 How to adjust the door lock


pin assembly
The following conditions are necessary for
check and adjustment of the lock pin

9-127
第九章 车身和附件

9.9.5.10 Door glass interior seal strip


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the front door triangle trim - front door.
See "front door triangle trim"
2 Remove the door interior trim panel. See “Front
door interior trim panel” or “Rear door glass inner
seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.
3 Prize up the rear door glass interior seal strip
with flat-edge tool.。
4 Remove the rear door glass interior seal strip.
Assembly procedures:
1 Clamp the rear door glass interior seal strip into
the window frame.
2 Check pasting condition of the strip and window
glass.
3 Assemble the door interior trim panel. See “Front
door interior trim panel” or “Rear door glass inner
seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.
4 Assemble the front door triangle trim - front door.
See "front door triangle trim"

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the glass outer seal strip to the
door outer panel seam.
2. Fix the door glass outer seal strip screw. ”
3. Confirm whether the strip is mounted flatly
or not.

9-128
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

bolt and preassembled rear chute bolt of the door.


3. Assemble and fix the glass stopper bolt.
4. Fix the door rear chute assembly bolt.
5. Assemble the door interior trim panel. See “Front
door interior trim panel” or “Rear door glass inner
seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.

9.9.5.11 Door chute assembly


Disassembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and
assembly, appoint an assistant to support the
door to avoid possible damage of the vehicle
or personal injury.
1. Remove the door interior trim panel. See
“Front door internal trim panel” or “Rear door
glass inner seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.
2. Remove waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.
3. Unscrew the door glass stopper bolt.
4. Unscrew the fixing bolt of the door chute
assembly.
5. Remove the door chute assembly.

Assembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and
assembly, appoint an assistant to support the
door to avoid possible damage of the vehicle
or personal injury.
1. Assemble the door chute assembly into the
door.
2. Assemble and fix the front chute assembly

9-129
第九章 车身和附件

9.9.5.12 Door seal strip


Disassembly procedures:
Special tool: BD-0001 interior trim buckle
crow plate
1. Prize up the seal strip buckle along the door
with buckle crow plate.
2. Remove the door seal strip.

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the seal strip on the door.
2. Insert the seal strip into the buckle.

9.9.5.13 Door frame seal strip


Disassembly procedures:
1. Open the door frame seal strip along the
door.
2. Remove the door frame seal strip. 9.9.5.14 Door outer handle lever
Assembly procedures: Disassembly procedures:
1. Assemble the door frame seal strip to the 1. Remove the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
door frame. film”.
2. Press the seal strip evenly to ensure firm 2. Disassemble the lever from the outer handle.
mounting. 3. Disassemble the lever from the door lock
assembly.
4. Remove the door outer handle lever.

9-130
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the outer handle to the door. See
“Door outer handle”.
2. Assemble the lever to the door lock
assembly.
3. Assemble the lever to the door outer handle.
4. Assemble the waterproof film. See
“Waterproof film”.

9-131
第九章 车身和附件

3. Disassemble the door lock assembly lever.


4. Remove the door lock cylinder lever.
Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the door lock cylinder to the door. See
“Door lock cylinder”.
2. Connect the lever to the door lock assembly.
3. Connect the lever to the door lock cylinder.
4. Assemble the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.

9.9.5.16 Door lock cylinder


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.
2 Remove the outer handle cover and screws.
3 Disassemble the door lock assembly from the
lock cylinder lever.
4 Remove the door lock cylinder snap spring.
5 Remove the outer handle decorative cover
6 Remove the door lock cylinder.
Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the lock cylinder to the outer handle
trim cover.
2 Assemble the outer handle cover to the outer
handle.
3 Assemble the door lock cylinder snap spring.
4 Assemble the lever to the door lock cylinder.
5 Assemble the outer handle cover and screws.
6 Assemble the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.

9.9.5.15 Door lock cylinder lever


Disassembly procedures:
1. Remove the waterproof film. See
“Waterproof film”.
2. Disassemble the door lock cylinder lever.

9-132
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

the rear seat of the clamp, and then remove the rear-
view mirror assembly mounting nut.
4 Remove the outer rear mirror assembly.

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the outer rear mirror assembly to the
door.
2 Assemble and tighten the exterior mirror
mounting nut, and attach the front door strip clip to
the rear mount base.
3 Assemble the electric connector of the outer rear
mirror
4 Assemble the front door triangle trim part.

9.9.5.17 Outer rear mirror assembly


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the front door triangle trim
part.see“front door triangle trim part”
2 Disconnect electric connector of the outer
rear mirror
3 First remove the front door strip hanging on

9-133
第九章 车身和附件

normally or not.
3. Change it with new door.
4. Change it with new door hinge.
Note: The door adjustment range shall be in
line with the technical specification provided by the
manufacturer. Unauthorized adjustment may cause
improper closing location so as to damage the
components.
Adjustment procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and assembly,
appoint an assistant to support the door to avoid
possible damage of the vehicle or personal injury.
1. Open the door.
2. Unscrew the hinge bolt on the body side to ensure
the door can be adjusted.
3. Adjust the clearance. See “Clearance and
flatness”.
4. After adjusting, measure the clearance again and
check the fit condition of the door lock assembly and
door locking pin assembly.
5. If the door locking pin assembly needs to be
adjusted, see “How to adjust the door locking pin
assembly”.
6. Close the door after adjusting.
A) Column A and front door
B) Fender and front door
C) Front door and outer side wall panel (lower part)
D) Front door and rear door (1)
E) Front door and rear door (2)
F) Backdoor and outer side wall panel (lower part)
G) Rear door and outer side wall panel (rear part)
H) Rear door and outer side wall panel (upper part)

9.9.5.18 Door adjustment


The following conditions are necessary for
check and adjustment of the door:
1. The door is impacted by huge external force.
2. The door cannot be opened and closed

9-134
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

pasting.
3. Assemble the door interior trim panel. See “Front
door interior trim panel” or “Rear door glass inner
seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.

9.9.5.19 Waterproof film


Disassembly procedures:
1. Remove the door interior trim panel. See
“Front door interior trim panel” or “Rear door
glass inner seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.
2. Mark mounting location of the waterproof
film.
3. Remove the waterproof film.
4. Remove the waterproof sealant on the door
thoroughly.

Assembly procedures:
Note: Paste the waterproof film without
any dust or other foreign matter. Any foreign
matter may cause uneven pasting or loss of
pasting so as to cause interior leakage.
1. Paste the waterproof film according to the
marked location.
2. Confirm the pasting location and press the
gum behind the waterproof film to ensure firm

9-135
第九章 车身和附件

2. Remove the waterproof film. See “Waterproof


film”.
3. Remove the door opening limiter.

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the door opening limiter to the door.
2. Assemble the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.
3. Assemble and fix the door opening limiter bolt to
torque 9N·m~11N·m.

9.9.5.20 Door opening limiter


Disassembly procedures:
1. Remove the fixing bolt of the opening
limiter.

9-136
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

glass inner seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.


2 Remove the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.
3 Shake the window let the glass mounting point to
the hole of inside door,remove the glass mounting
bolts,remove the glass assembly。
4 Unscrew the window lifter assembly bolt.
5 Disconnect the electric connecter of the window
lifter assembly。
6 Remove the window lifter assembly

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the window lifter assembly to the door.
2 Connect the window lifter assembly connector.
3 Assemble and fix the window lifter assembly
bolt to the torque 3.5N·m~5.5N·m.。
4 Assemble the door glass assembly.
5 Assemble the waterproof film. See “Waterproof
film”.
6 Assemble the door interior trim panel. See “Front
door interior trim panel” or “Rear door glass inner
seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.

9.9.5.22 Electric window


main/subsidiary switch assembly
Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the door trim panel. See "Interior trim
panel" or "Back door trim panel" in "Interior
trim".。
2 Remove the fixing screws of the door lock cover
assembly。
3 Disconnect the electric connector of the window
lifter. ‘
4 Remove fixing screw of the electric window
switch assembly.
5 Remove the electric window switch assembly.
Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble and fasten the power window switch
assembly screws to the switch cover.
2 Connect the electric connector of the window
lifter.
3 Assemble the electric window switch assembly
to the door interior trim panel.
4 Assemble the door interior trim panel. See
"Interior trim panel" or "Back door trim panel" in
"Interior trim".

9.9.5.21 Window lifter assembly


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the door interior trim panel. See
“Front door interior trim panel” or “Rear door

9-137
第九章 车身和附件

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the filler cap to the body.
2 Assemble and fix the filler cap bolt.
3 Close the filler cap.

9.9.5.24 Filler cap stay cable


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the left front doorsill. See “Front
doorsill” in the “Interior trim part”.
2 Remove the carpet assembly.
3 Separate the fuel filler cap handle and cable
connection.
4 Remove rear left door threshold. See "Interior
trim" in the "back door threshold."
5 Remove the B-pillar trim panel. See "B-pillar
interior trim" in "Interior trim".
6 Remove the rear side under inner trim body. See
"Interior trim" on the back side under trim body.
7 Open the filler cap
8 Separate the cable to the fuel filler cap cylinder.
9 Remove the filler cap control stay cable.

9.9.5.23 Filler cap


Disassembly procedures:
1 Open the filler cap.
2 Unscrew the filler cap bolt.
3 Remove the filler cap.

9-138
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the filler cap stay cable to the
fuel filler cover cylinder
2 Assemble the stay cable to the control
handle.
3 Paste the fixing tape of the filler cap stay
cable.
4 Assemble the right rear side wall interior
trim panel. See “Right rear side wall interior
trim panel” in the “Interior trim part”.
5 Assemble the B-pillar trim panel. See "B-
pillar interior trim" in "Interior trim".
6 Assemble the left rear threshold. See
"Interior trim" in the "back door threshold."
7 Assemble the left front door sill. See
"Interior trim" in the "front door threshold"。
8 Close the filler cap.

9.9.6 Special tool

9-139
第九章 车身和附件

Part
Diagram No./descriptio
n

Interior trim
buckle crow
plate

Heat gun

9.10 Rear-end
9.10.1 Specification
9.10.1.1 Fastener torque
Application Specification (N﹒m)

Bolt – backdoor hinge 21~25

Bolt – backdoor hinge 13~16

Bolt – backdoor body assembly 3~5


Bolt – backdoor lock pin assembly 5~7

Bolt – backdoor outer handle assembly 3~5

Bolt – backdoor supporting rod ball-head bolt 15~18

Bolt – backdoor limiter 5~7


Bolt – spoiler assembly 3~5

9.10.1.2 Clearance and flatness

9-140
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Name Application
Clearance Parallelism Flatness tolerance
size(mm) tolerance (mm) (mm)
-
2.0±1.5(referen
Top cover and backdoor 8.0±1.5 2.0
ce to the top
cover)
-
Rear outer side wall panel 1.0±1.5(referen
5.0±1.0 1.0
and backdoor ce to the top
cover)
Rear outer side panel and
/ / /
backdoor glass
Rear combined lamp and
/ / /
backdoor glass
Rear combined lamp and
1.5±1.0 1.5 /
backdoor
Rear bumper body
(vertical section) and 5.0±1.5 1.5 /
backdoor
Rear bumper body
(horizontal section) and 6.0±2.0 2.0 /
backdoor

9.10.2 Diagram of body rear-end

9-141
第九章 车身和附件

appoint an assistant to support the backdoor to avoid


possible damage of the vehicle or personal injury.
Note:
Before disassembly and assembly, firstly arrange the
protection pad around the door to avoid damage of the
vehicle.
Before operation, firstly disconnect negative pole
terminal of the accumulator. Don’t operate under live
condition to avoid personal injury and vehicle damage
due to short circuit.
1 Remove the backdoor interior trim panel. See
“Backdoor glass inner seal strip”.
2 Remove the rear combination lamp assembly. See
"Interior trim" in "Back door trim
3 Disconnect the electric connector of the license plate
lamp.
4 Disconnect electric connector of the rear wiper
5 Remove the spoiler assembly. See “Spoiler
assembly”” 。
6 Prize up the backdoor cover and pull out backdoor wire
harness.
7 Remove the rear license plate lamp cover assembly.
8 Remove the license plate lamp assembly. See “License
plate lamp”
9 Remove the rear wiper arm
10 Remove the rear wiper motor 。 See “Rear wiper
assembly” in the “Wiper system/washer system”.
11 Remove the backdoor glass. See “Backdoor glass” in
the “Fixed window”.
12 Remove the backdoor outer handle assembly. See
“Backdoor outer handle assembly”。
13 Remove the backdoor lock cylinder. See “Backdoor
lock cylinder”.
14 Remove the backdoor bumper block. See “Backdoor
bumper block”.
15 Remove the logo (rear). See “Logo” in the “Exterior
trim part”.
16 Remove the backdoor supporting rod. See “Backdoor
supporting rod”.
17 Remove the backdoor hinge. See “Backdoor hinge”
18 Remove the backdoor assembly.

9.10.3 Maintenance guidance


9.10.3.1 Backdoor
Disassembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and assembly,

9-142
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

injury.
Note:
Before disassembly and assembly, firstly arrange
the protection pad around the backdoor to avoid damage
of the vehicle body and paint coat.
Before operation, firstly disconnect the negative
pole terminal of the accumulator. Don't operate under
live condition to avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage due to short circuit of the accumulator.
1 Move the backdoor to the rear-end.
2 Assemble the backdoor hinge. See “Backdoor hinge”
3 Assemble the backdoor supporting rod. See “Backdoor
supporting rod”
4 Assemble the backdoor lock. See “Backdoor lock”
5 Close the backdoor and check the clearance and
flatness. See “Clearance and flatness”。
6 If the backdoor needs to be adjusted, see “Backdoor
adjustment”.
7 Check the fit condition between the backdoor body
assembly and backdoor lock pin assembly.
8 If the backdoor lock pin assembly needs to be adjusted,
see “How to adjust backdoor lock pin assembly”.
9 Assemble the logo (rear). See “Logo” in the “Exterior
trim part”.
10 Assemble the backdoor outer handle assembly. See
“Backdoor outer handle assembly”.
11 Assemble the rear wiper motor
12 Assemble the rear wiper support
13 Assemble the license plate lamp assembly and license
plate lamp cover assembly. See “License plate lamp
assembly” in the “Lighting system”.
14 Assemble the contact switch.
15 Assemble the spoiler assembly. See “Spoiler
assembly” in the “Rear-end”.
16 Insert the backdoor wire harness and assemble the
backdoor gum cover.
17 Assemble the rear combination lamp assembly.
18 Connect the electric connector of the wiper
19 Connect the license plate lamp connector.
20 Assemble the backdoor interior trim panel. See
“Backdoor glass inner seal strip” in the “Interior trim part”.

Assembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and assembly,
appoint an assistant to support the backdoor to
avoid possible damage of the vehicle or personal
9-143
第九章 车身和附件

9.10.3.2 Backdoor adjustment


1. The backdoor is impacted by huge external force.
2. The backdoor cannot be opened and closed normally.
3. Change it with a new backdoor.
4. Change it with a new backdoor hinge.
Note: The backdoor adjustment range shall be in line
with the technical specification provided by the
manufacturer. Unauthorized adjustment may cause
improper closing location so as to damage the
components.
The backdoor adjustment includes frontal plane adjustment
(clearance adjustment) and turnover plane adjustment
(flatness adjustment). The former can be used to realize
clearance adjustment by adjusting the relative position of
backdoor hinge to the body assembly. The latter can be
used to realize flatness adjustment by adjusting the
backdoor limiter thickness.

Clearance adjustment
Warning: During disassembly and assembly,
appoint an assistant to support the backdoor to avoid
possible damage of the vehicle or personal injury.
1 Open the backdoor.
2 Remove the backdoor supporting rod. See “Backdoor
supporting rod”
3 Unscrew bolts from the hinge to the body to ensure the
backdoor can be adjusted.
4 Adjust the clearance range. See “Clearance and
flatness”.
5 After adjusting, measure the clearance and check the fit
condition between the backdoor lock body and the
backdoor lock pin assembly.
6 Close the door after adjustment.
Flatness adjustment:
1 Open the backdoor.
2 Increase or decrease the gaskets according to the actual
measured value.
3 Adjust the flatness. See “How to adjust the backdoor
lock pin assembly”.
4 After adjustment, measure the flatness again, and check
the fit condition between the back lock body assembly and
the lock pin assembly.
5 When adjusting, see “How to adjust the backdoor lock
pin assembly”.
6 Close the door after adjustment.
Note
A Top cover and backdoor.
B Rear bumper assembly and backdoor (vertical section)。
C Rear bumper assembly and backdoor (horizontal section)

9-144
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

backdoor.
3. Remove the backdoor frame seal strip. See
“Backdoor frame seal strip”.
4. Prize up the buckle on the rear part of the top.
5. Remove the backdoor supporting rod. See
“Backdoor supporting rod”.
6. Remove the nuts from the backdoor hinge to the
body.
7. Remove the hinge from the backdoor.

Assembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and assembly,
appoint an assistant to support the backdoor to
avoid possible damage of the vehicle or personal
injury.
1. Assemble the hinge to the backdoor according to
the marked location.
2. Assemble and fix the hinge to the backdoor bolt to
torque 21N·m~25N·m.
3. More the backdoor to the rear end of the body.
4. Assemble the hinge to the body according to the
marked location.
5. Assemble and fix the hinge nut to the body to the
torque 13N·m~16N·m.
6. Close the door after assembly.
7. Measure the clearance and flatness, and check the
fit condition between the backdoor lock body
assembly and the backdoor lock pin assembly.
1) If the clearance and flatness need to be adjusted.
See “Clearance and flatness”.
2) If the backdoor lock pin assembly needs to be
adjusted, see the “How to adjust the backdoor lock
pin assembly”.
8 Assemble the back door support rob 。see back
door support rob”。
9.10.3.3 Backdoor hinge
9 Close the door after adjustment.
Disassembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and
assembly, appoint an assistant to support the
backdoor to avoid possible damage of the
vehicle or personal injury.
1. Open the backdoor.
2. Mark the hinge location on the body and

9-145
第九章 车身和附件

4 Disconnect the electrical connector of the back


door lock。
5 Remove the backdoor lock body assembly bolt
6 Remove the backdoor lock body assembly.

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the backdoor lock body assembly into
the backdoor according to the marked location.
2 Assemble and fix the backdoor lock body
assembly bolt tightly.
3 Assemble the backdoor interior trim panel. See
“Backdoor glass inner seal strip”。
4 Close the backdoor.

9.10.3.4 Backdoor lock body


assembly
Disassembly procedures:
1 Open the backdoor.
2 Mark location of the backdoor lock body on
the backdoor.
3 Disassemble the backdoor interior trim
panel. See “Backdoor glass inner seal strip”

9-146
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

1 Open the backdoor.


2 Remove the back door threshold。
3 Connect the back door lock electrical connector.
4 Mark the mounting location of the lock pin
assembly.
5 Remove the backdoor lock pin assembly bolt.。
6 Remove the backdoor lock pin assembly.

Assembly procedures:
1 Fix the backdoor lock pin assembly according to
the marked location.
2 Assemble and fix the mounting bolt of the
backdoor lock pin assembly. Close the backdoor and
check the fit condition between the backdoor lock
body assembly and the backdoor lock pin assembly.
If the backdoor lock pin assembly needs to be
adjusted, see “How to adjust the backdoor lock pin
assembly”.
3 Check the clearance and flatness.
4 If the clearance and flatness need to be adjusted,
see “Clearance and flatness”.
5 Assemble the back door threshold。
6 Close the back door.

9.10.3.5 Backdoor lock pin assembly


Disassembly procedures:

9-147
第九章 车身和附件

1. The backdoor cannot be opened and closed


normally.
2. Change it with a new backdoor.
3. Change it with a new backdoor hinge.
4. Close the backdoor after adjustment.
Check procedures:
1. Confirm whether clearance and flatness of the
backdoor are within the specified range or not.
2. Check the fit location between the backdoor lock
body assembly and backdoor lock pin assembly.
3. If necessary, apply the paint with color marking
action on the opening of the backdoor lock body
assembly.
4. Close the door and keep the mark on the backdoor
lock pin assembly.
5. Check the marked location on the backdoor lock
pin assembly.
Adjustment procedures:
1. Unscrew the backdoor lock pin assembly bolt to
ensure the lock pin assembly can be adjusted.
2. Adjust it suitably according to the marked
location.
3. Fix the backdoor lock pin assembly with bolt.
4. Fix the backdoor lock pin assembly tightly.
5. Close the backdoor after adjustment.

9.10.3.7 How to change the backdoor


micro switch
Disassembly procedures:
1 Open the back door.
2 Remove the back door trim. See "Interior trim"
in "Back door trim."
3 Disconnect the back door micro switch connector.
4 Remove the rear license plate cover body. See
"Large rear license plate cover".

9.10.3.6 How to adjust the backdoor


lock pin assembly
The following conditions are necessary for
check and adjustment of the lock pin
assembly:

9-148
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

rear license plate bracket.


2 Assemble rear license plate lamp cover . See
"Large rear license plate cover".
3 Connect the back door micro switch connector.
4 Assemble the back door trim. See "Interior trim"
in "Back door trim."
5 Close the back door.

5 Use the flat blade tool to pry out the back


door micro switch.

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the back door micro switch to the
9-149
第九章 车身和附件

4. Close the door.

9.10.3.8 Backdoor supporting rod


Disassembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and
assembly, appoint an assistant to support the
backdoor to avoid possible damage of the
vehicle or personal injury.
1. Open the backdoor.
2. Prize up the snap spring at the both ends with
flat-edge tool.
3. Disassemble the two ends of the backdoor
supporting rod from the ball-head bolt.
4. Remove the backdoor supporting rod.

Assembly procedures:
Warning: During disassembly and
assembly, appoint an assistant to support the
backdoor to avoid possible damage of the
vehicle or personal injury.
1. Assemble the backdoor supporting rod to the
door.
2. Connect the backdoor supporting rod to the
ball-head bolt on the both ends.
3. Assemble the snap spring.
9-150
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.10.3.9 Backdoor supporting ball-


head bolt
Disassembly procedures
Warning: During disassembly and
assembly, appoint an assistant to support the
backdoor to avoid possible damage of the
vehicle or personal injury.
1. Remove the backdoor supporting rod. See
“Backdoor supporting rod”.
2. Remove the ball-head bolt assembly.

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the support on the both ends of the
backdoor supporting rod.
2. Assemble the backdoor supporting rod. See
“Air spring supporting rod”

9.10.3.10 Backdoor frame seal strip


Disassembly procedures:
1. Open the backdoor.
2. Remove the backdoor frame seal strip from the
peripheral part seam on the backdoor.
Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the backdoor frame seal strip to the rear
end of the body.
2. When assembling, confirm whether the opening of
the backdoor frame seal strip is aligned with the
backdoor buckle or not.
3. Press the backdoor frame seal strip by hand to
ensure the backdoor frame seal strip is fixed firmly.
4. Close the backdoor.

9.10.3.11 Spoiler assembly


Disassembly procedures:
Note: Before operation, firstly disconnect the
negative pole terminal of the accumulator. Don't
operate under live condition to avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage due to short circuit of
the accumulator.
1 Open the backdoor.

9-151
第九章 车身和附件

2 Remove the interior door panel assembly


see "rear door frame trim panel assembly".
3 Remove the black cover from the mounting
holes on both ends of the spoiler assembly.
4 Unplug the hose connector and the high-
brake lamp harness connector.
5 Remove the nut from the spoiler.
6 Remove the spoiler assembly.

Assembly procedures:
Note: Before operation, firstly disconnect
the negative pole terminal of the accumulator.
Don't operate under live condition to avoid
personal injury and vehicle damage due to
short circuit of the accumulator.
1 Move the spoiler assembly to the back door,
connect the hose connector and the high-brake
light harness connector, and assemble the
corresponding cover.
2 Attach the spoiler assembly to the back door
and assemble the nut.
3 Assemble the block cover.
4 Assemble the interior panel assembly on the
back door frame and the "Interior panel
assembly on the back door frame".
5 Close the backdoor.

9-152
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.10.4 Special tool


Diagram Tool
No./name

Interior trim
buckle crow
plate

9-153
第九章 车身和附件

9.11 Vehicle information


9.11.1Specification
9.11.1.1 Body's dimension

1
14
11
9 16
1

6 15
2 7
3
8
5 4 12
10
13

unit:mm
1 2 3 4

7 8 15 16

Dimension:(mm)
1~2: 1462 3~4:1426.3 5~6: 753
7~8: 958 9~10: 1386 11~12: 1160
13~14: 1272.5 15~16: 1045
3、4、15、16 is the centre of the hole

9-154
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

a
b b
1

c c

e e
d

unit:mm
b e

Dimension:(mm)
a~d: 975 b~e: 1292 c~c: 1114.5

9-155
第九章 车身和附件

9.12 Seat
9.12.1Specification
9.12.1.1 Fastener torque

Application Specification(N·m)
Front seat assembly 40~50
Sixth seat assembly(Five-passenger
40~50
rear)
Fouth seat assembly(Five-passenger
40~50
rear)
Sixth seat assembly(Seven-passenger
40~50
rear)
Fouth seat assembly(Seven-passenger
40~50
rear)
Split rear seat assembly(Seven-
40~50
passenger third-row folding)

9-156
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.12.2Diagram of the components


9.12.2.1 Front-row seat

9.12.2.2 Fouth / Sixth seat(Five-passenger rear)

9-157
第九章 车身和附件

9.12.2.3Fouth / Sixth seat(Seven-passenger middle)

9-158
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9-159
第九章 车身和附件

9.12.2.4Rear-row Split seat(Seven-passenger third row seat)

9-160
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.12.3 Diagnostic information and program


9.12.3.1 Mechanical diagnosis of the seat adjuster

Application Possible reasons Remedies


1 The seat adjuster handle is 1. Repair the handle to ensure
distorted or bent.。 the handle can be loosened and
2 The adjuster lock return locked on the both sides, or
Self-lock of the adjuster cannot spring is broken。 change it.
be finished. 3 The lock is glued on the 2. Assemble a new adjuster.
adjuster。 3. Lubricate the lock spindle
with special lubricant. If the lock
latch is stuck, eliminate the
reason or change the adjuster.
1. The new adjuster has not been 1. Move the seat for many times
run in (needing 20 times of repeatedly forward and
running-in). backward to make the rail
The seat is difficult to be moved 2. The adjuster is lubricated smooth.
backward. improperly. 2. Lubricate the adjuster rail
3. The rail is bent or damaged so with special automobile
as to cause the adjuster lubricant or equivalent product.
unsmooth. 3. Change the adjustor.
1 When mounting, , one rail is 1. More the seat forward as
in front the other rail is in the much as possible.
The adjuster rail , one is in front back . 2. Unscrew the bolts from the
the other one is in the back . adjustor to the floor.
3. Lock the seat and tighten the
bolt from the adjustor to the
floor(40-50 N·m)。

9-161
第九章 车身和附件

9.12.4 Maintenance guidance


9.12.4.1 Front-row seat assembly
Disassembly procedures
Before operation, firstly disconnect
the negative pole terminal of the
accumulator. Don't operate under
live condition to avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage due to
short circuit of the accumulator.
1/Disconnect the electrical connectors
belts。
2 Disconnect the side airbag electrical
connectors。
3 Remove the front seat assembly mounting
bolts。

Assembly procedures
Note: Before operation, firstly
disconnect the negative pole
terminal of the accumulator. Don't
operate under live condition to
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage due to short circuit of the
accumulator.
1 Assemble the front-row seat assembly to
the compartment by hole.。
2 Assemble and fix the bolts of the front-row
seat to torque 22 N·m~30 N·m。
3 Connect the electric connectors。

9.12.4.2 Sixth seat assembly ( Five-


passenger rear)
Disassembly procedures
1 With a bolt-shaped cutting edge
detachment port knocking seat cover foot
cover foot ornaments
2 Remove mounting bolts。
3 Remove the sixth seat assembly。

9-162
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Assembly procedures:
1 The seat assembly is mounted to the floor
of the hole。
2 Assemble and fix the bolts of the front-row
seat to torque 40 N·m~50 N·m。
3 Seat cover fastening foot。

9.12.4.3 Fourth seat assembly ( Five-


passenger rear)
Disassembly procedures
1 With a bolt-shaped cutting edge
detachment port knocking seat cover foot
cover foot ornaments。
2 Remove mounting bolts。
3 Remove the seat assembly。

Assembly procedures
1 The seat assembly is mounted to the floor
of the hole。
2 Assemble and fix the bolts of the front-row
seat to torque 40 N·m~50 N·m。
3 Seat cover fastening foot。

9-163
第九章 车身和附件

9.12.4.4 Sixth seat assembly ( Seven-


passenger mid)
Disassembly procedures
1 With a bolt-shaped cutting edge
detachment port knocking seat cover foot
cover foot ornaments。
2 Remove mounting bolts。
3 Remove the seat assembly。

Assembly procedures
1 The seat assembly is mounted to the floor
of the hole。
2 Assemble and fix the bolts of the front-row
seat to torque 40 N·m~50 N·m。
3 Seat cover fastening foot。

9.12.4.5Fourth seat assembly ( Seven-


passenger mid)
Disassembly procedures
1 With a bolt-shaped cutting edge
detachment port knocking seat cover foot
cover foot ornaments
2 Remove mounting bolts。
3 Pull backrest angle cable, the backrest flat;
then pull the seat lock cable and lock the seat
out, flip the seat, remove the front foot after
the fixing bolts。
4 Remove the seat assembly。
5 Remove the seat lock。

9-164
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Assembly procedures
1 The seat lock is mounted to the floor。
2 The seat assembly is mounted to the floor
of the hole。
3 Assemble and fix the bolts of the front-row
seat to torque 40 N·m~50 N·m。
4 Fastening seat trim cover。

9.12.4.6Rear seat assembly


Disassembly procedures
1 Remove the front seat trim cover feet。
2 Remove the seat fixing bolts。
3 Remove the rear seat assembly。

9-165
第九章 车身和附件

N·m。
3 Fastening seat trim cover。

Assembly procedures
1 The rear seat assembly is mounted to
the floor of the hole。
2 Assemble and fix the bolts of the
front-row seat to torque 40 N·m ~ 50

9-166
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.13 Interior trim part


9.13.1Specification
9.13.1.1 Fastener torque

Application Specification(N·m)
Bolt – door interior trim panel 2~3
Bolt – sun visor assembly 3~5
Bolt – safety handle 3~5
Bolt – lower interior panel of the
2~3
rear side wall

9-167
第九章 车身和附件

9.13.2.1 Interior trim panel of column A


Disassembly procedures:
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Use snap skid plate separatethe clips of
interior trim panel of column A
2 Unplug the speaker connector。
3 Remove the interior trim panel of column
A。

Assembly procedures
1 Install the interior trim panel of column
Ato the position of body sheet metal,
and insert the interior trim panel of
column Ainto the body sheet metal。
2 Connect the speaker connector。
3 Install the interior trim panel of column
A。

Note: When the interior trim panel is


disassembled and installed, the inner board
clip must be replaced completely. Otherwise,
the inner panel may be badly connected,
which may cause abnormal sound when
driving.

9.13.2.2 Interior lower trim panel of


column A
Diassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Remove the front door threshold. See
"Front door threshold"
2 Remove the front door frame seal. See
"Front door frame seal"
3 Use the snap levers to pry out the mounting
clips on the inner panel of the A-pillar.
4 Remove the Interior lower trim panel of
column A。

9.13.2 Maintenance guidance


9-168
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

1 Place the Interior lower trim panel of column A


under the appropriate position。
2 Snap the mounting clip into the mounting point。
3 Install the front door frame seal. See "Front Door
Frame Seal"”
4 Install the front door threshold. See "Front door
threshold"。
Note : When the interior trim
panel is disassembled and
installed, the inner board clip
must be replaced. Otherwise, it
may cause the inner board to be
badly connected and cause the
abnormal sound during driving.。

9.13.2.3 Interior trim panelof the front door


Diassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Remove the front door triangle trim。
2 Remove the mounting clips on the body of the
Interior trim panel。
3 Remove the front door handle assembly screw. See
"Inside door handle assembly and cable
assembly"。
4 Remove the front door clasppad。
5 Remove the fixing screw on the front door
handle。
6 Remove the door lamp trim assembly
7 Use the trim trim lever to separate the trim clip.
8 Remove the interior trim panel of the front door

Assembly procedures
1 Placedthe interior trim panel of the front door in
the corresponding position of the body sheet
metal, the front door trim board stuck in the
body sheet metal。
2 Instal door lights decorative pieces assembly。
3 Install the front door handle fastening screws.
4 Install front door buckle pads。
5 Install the front door handle assembly screws. See
"Inside door handle assembly and cable
assembly".
6 Instal the mounting clips of the interior trim panel
of the front door
7 Install the front door triangle trim。
8 Close the back door。

Assembly procedures

9-169
第九章 车身和附件

column B
Diassembly procedures
1 Remove the front door frame seal. See "Front
door frame seal"。
2 Remove the rear door seal. See "Back Door
Seal".
3 Remove the B-pillar inner trim assembly. See
"GB under pillar panels".
4 Remove the interior upper trim panel of
column B。
5 Remove the B-pillar trim from the interior
upper trim panel of column B。
6 Lower the lower end of the safety belt and
remove it through the hole in the B-belt seat belt
slide plate。
Assembly procedures
1 Pass the lower end of the safety belt through
the hole in the B-pillar belt slide plate。
2 Instalthe interior upper trim panel of column
B to the B-pillar inner panel assembly。
3 Install and tighten the bolt ofthe interior
upper trim panel of column B。
4 Install the interior lower trim panel of column
B. See "The interior upper trim panel of
column B"。
5 Install the front door frame seal. See "Front
door frame seal"。
6 Install the rear door seal. See "Front door
frame seal"。
Note :When the interior trim panel is
disassembled and installed, the inner
board clip must be replaced.
Otherwise, it may cause the inner
board to be badly connected and
cause the abnormal sound during
driving.
9.13.2.5 Interior lower trim panel of column B
Diassembly procedures
1 Remove the front door threshold. See "Front door threshold"。
2 Remove the rear door threshold. See "Back door threshold"。
3 Remove the front door frame seal. See "Front door frame
seal"。
4 Remove the rear door seal. See "Back Door Seal".
5 Remove the front seat belt lower position fixing bolts.
6 Removethe interior lower trim panel of column B

9.13.2.4 Interior upper trim panel of


9-170
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

1 Install the interior lower trim panel to the B-


pillar。
2 Install and tighten the lower seat belt anchor
bolts to 45 N • m to 60 N • m。
3 Install the front door frame seal. See "Front
door frame seal"。
4 Install the rear door seal. See "Back Door
Seal"。
5 Install the back door threshold. See "Back
door threshold"。
6 Install the front door threshold. See "Front
door threshold"。

Note : When the interior trim panel


is disassembled and installed, the
inner board clip must be replaced.
Otherwise, it may cause the inner
board to be badly connected and
cause the abnormal sound during
driving.。

9.13.2.6The interior trim panel of rear door


Disassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Remove the front door handle assembly
screw. See "Inside door handle assembly
and cable assembly"。
2 Remove the rear door clasp pad。
3 Remove the rear door clasp mounting
screws。
4 Use the interior trim panel buckle to
separate the trim clip。
5 Remove the interior trim panel of rear
door。

Assembly procedures
1 Placed the interior trim panel of rear door to
the corresponding position of the body
sheet metal, rear door panels stuck into
the body sheet metal。
2 Install the rear door clasp screw。
3 Install the back door buckle pad。
4 Install the rear door handle assembly. See
"Inside door handle assembly and cable
assembly"。
5 Close the front door。

Assembly procedures

9-171
第九章 车身和附件

9.13.2.7 Rear side upper interior trim panel


assembly (5-passenger)
Disassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Remove the rear door seal. See "Rear Door
Seal"。
2 Remove the second row of seat belt lower
anchor bolts。
3 Remove rear side lower interior trim panel.
See "rear side lower interior trim panel"。
4 Use the claw levers to separate the trim
clamps。
5 Put the down of seat beltthrough the hole
of the rear side upper interior trim pane。
6 Removethe rear side upper interior trim
panel assembly。

Assembly procedures
1 Put the down of seat beltthrough the hole of
the rear side upper interior trim pane。
2 Placethe rear side upper interior trim panel
to the body of the corresponding sheet
metal position, take the rear side upper
interior trim panel assembly stuck into the
body sheet metal。
3 Install the rear side upper interior trim panel
assembly. See "the rear side upper interior trim
panel assembly”。
4 Install the second row of lower belt anchor
bolts to 45 N • m to 60 N • m。
5 Install the rear door seal. See "Rear Door
Seal."”。
Note :When the interior trim panel is
disassembled and installed, the inner
board clip must be replaced.
Otherwise, it may cause the inner
board to be badly connected and
cause the abnormal sound during
driving.

9.13.2.8Rear side upper interior trim panel assembly (7


passenger)
Disassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Remove the rear door seal. See "Back Door Seal"。
2 Remove the second and third row of lower seat belt anchor
bolts。
3 Remove Rear side upper interior trim panel. See "Rear side
upper interior trim panel”。
4 Use the claw levers to separate the trim clamps。
5 The lower end of the seat belt, through the rear side of the
inner panel of the corresponding hole removed。
6 Remove the rear side upper interior trim panel assembly

9-172
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

1 Pass the lower end of the second row of


harnesses through the corresponding holes of
the rear side upper interior trim panel
2 Pass the lower end of the third row of
harnesses through the corresponding holes of
the rear side upper interior trim panel。
3 Place on the back side of the inner panel to
the corresponding body sheet metal
position, the rear side of the inner panels
stuck into the body sheet metal.
4 Install tof the rear side lower interior trim
panel . See "of the rear side lower interior trim
panel".
5 Install the second and third row lower
seatbelt fixing bolts to 35 N • m to 45 N • m.
6 Install the rear door seal. See "Back
DoorSeal"。

9.13.2.9Rear side lower interior trim panel


(5-passenger)
Disassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Remove the rear door threshold. See "Back
door threshold"。
2 Remove the rear door seal. See "Back Door
Seal"。
3 Remove the back door threshold. See "Back
door threshold"。
4 Remove the second row of seat belt anchor
bolts。
5 Set off the back side of the carpet.
6 Use clips to separate clips。
7 RemoveRear side lower interior trim panel

Assembly procedures
1 Placethe rear side lower interior trim panelto the
corresponding sheet metal body position, put the rear
side lower interior trim panelunder the card into the body
sheet metal。
2 Set off the back side of the carpet。
3 Install and tighten the lower end bolts of the harness
to 45 N • m to 60 N • m.
4 Install the back door threshold. See "Back door
threshold"。
5 Install the rear door seal. See "Back Door Seal"。
6 Install the back door threshold. See "Back door
threshold"。
Note : When the inner trim panel is
disassembled and installed, the inner trim
clamps must be replaced. Otherwise, the
interior boards may be badly connected,
which may cause abnormal sound during
driving.

Assembly procedures
9-173
第九章 车身和附件

Disassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Remove the rear door threshold. See "Back
door threshold"。
2 Remove the rear door seal. See "Back Door
Seal"。
3 Remove the back door threshold. See "Back
door threshold."”。
4 Remove the second row of seat belt anchor
bolts。
5 Remove the third row of seat belt anchor
bolts。
6 Set off the back side of the carpet。
7 Use clips to separate clips。
8 Remove Rear side lower interior trim
panel。

Assembly procedures
1 Place the rear side lower interior trim panel
to the corresponding sheet metal body
position, put the rear side lower interior trim
panel under the card into the body sheet
metal
2 Set off the back side of the carpet。
3 Install and tighten the second row of seat
belt lower end bolts to 45 N • m to 60 N • m.
4 Install and tighten the second row of seat
belt lower end bolts to 45 N • m to 60 N • m.。
5 Install the back door threshold. See "Back
door threshold"。
6 Install the rear door seal. See "Back Door
Seal"。
7 Install the back door threshold. See "Back
door threshold"。
9.13.2.11 Rear door interiortrim panel
Disassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Open the back door。
2 Use the claw levers to separate the trim
clamps。
3 Remove the back doorinterior trim panel。
Note :When the interior trim panel is
disassembled and installed, the inner
board clip must be replaced.
Otherwise, it may cause the inner
board to be badly connected and
cause the abnormal sound during
driving.。

9.13.2.10Rear side lower interior trim


panel (Seve-passenger)
9-174
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

1 Placed in the rear door trim panel to the


corresponding position of the body sheet
metal, the rear door trim board stuck into
the body sheet metal.
2 Close the back door。

Note : When the interior trim panel


is disassembled and installed, the
inner board clip must be replaced.
Otherwise, it may cause the inner
board to be badly connected and
cause the abnormal sound during
driving.

9.13.2.12Rear door frameupper interior trim


panel
Disassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Use a snap-in lever with a centimeter snap
and the back door inner skin
2 Remove the rear door frameupper interior
trim panel

Assembly procedures
1 Align the clips of the rear door frame upper
interior trim panelwith the mounting holes on the
inner skin of the back door。
2 Put the rear door upper interior trim panel
stuck in the body sheet metal corresponding
position。

Note : When the interior trim panel


is disassembled and installed, the
inner board clip must be replaced.
Otherwise, it may cause the inner
board to be badly connected and
cause the abnormal sound during
driving.。

Assembly procedures
9-175
第九章 车身和附件

column interior trim


Disassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Remove the interior trim panel on the back
door frame. "See back panel door trim"
2 Remove the back door trim. "See back door
trim"
3 Remove the rear door frame column inner
panel fixing screws
4 Use a snap-in lever with a centimeter snap
and the back door inner skin。
5 Remove the rear door frame column interior
trim。

Assembly procedures
1 Put door frame pillar inner panel stuck inside
the back door。
2 Install and tighten the back panel door inner
panel screws。
3 Install the back door trim. "See back door
trim"
4 Install the trim panel on the back door frame.
"See back panel door trim"

Note : When the interior trim panel is


disassembled and installed, the inner
board clip must be replaced. Otherwise, it
may cause the inner board to be badly
connected and cause the abnormal sound
during driving.

9.13.2.14 Front door threshold


Disassembly procedures
1 Use the flat blade tool to pry the front door
threshold。
2 Remove the front door threshold

9.13.2.13 Rear door frame


9-176
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Assembly procedures
1 Align the front door threshold catch with the
body sheet metal mounting hole。
2 The front door threshold into the body sheet
metal corresponding position。

9.13.2.15 Back door threshold


Disassembly procedures
1 Use the flat blade tool to pry the threshold
clips。
2 Remove the rear door threshold。

Assembly procedures
1 Aligned the back door threshold catchwith the
body sheet metal mounting holes .
2 The back door threshold into the body sheet
metal corresponding position。

9-177
第九章 车身和附件

Disassembly procedures
1 Remove the box, to see the "trunk"
2 Use the flat blade tool to pry out the clip。
3 Remove the back door threshold。

Assembly procedures
1 Align the snaps of the back door
threshold with the body sheet metal
mounting holes。
2 The back door threshold into the body
sheet metal corresponding position。
3 Installation items box, to see the
"trunk"

9.13.2.17Trunk (with lorry kit)


Disassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Remove the boxbody。
2 Remove the cover from the box body
and the tool kit。
3 Remove the mounting bolts from the
box body and the tool kit
4 Use the buckle to separate the box
body clip。
5 Remove the body。
6 Remove the vehicle kit。

9.13.2.16 Back door threshold

9-178
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

1 Place the kit in the corresponding position。


2 Insert the box body into the rear door
3 Adjust the box body and the tool kit to align
their mounting holes with the corresponding
mounting holes in the vehicle body。
4 Install and tighten bolts to 35 N • m to 45 N •
m。
5 Install the box body。

9.13.2.18Trunk (without luggage kit)


Disassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Remove the box cover body。
2 Remove the cover of theboxbody。
3 Remove themounting bolts of
theboxbody
4 Use the buckle to separate the box
body clip。
5 Remove the box body。

Assembly procedures
1 Put the box body into the rear
doorthreshold。
2Align the mounting hole of the box body
to align with the corresponding mounting
hole.
3 Install and tighten bolts to 35 N • m to
45 N • m。
4 Install the box cover body。

Assembly procedures
9-179
第九章 车身和附件

Disassembly procedures
Note:Disconnect the battery negative terminal
before operation. Do not operate with electricity,
in order to avoid battery short-circuit caused by
personal injury and vehicle damage。
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Remove the sun visor assembly. See "Sun Visor
Assembly"。
2 Remove the car front and rear reading lights。
3 Removw interior trim panel of column A 。See“Interior trim
panel of column A”
4 Removw interior trim panel of column B 。See“Interior trim
panel of column B”。
5 Remove the safety handle. See also "Safety handle"。
6 Remove the top evaporator decoration shell。
7 Remove rear side upper interior trim panel 。 See“rear side
upper interior trim panel”
8 Remove the back door frame seal. See "Back Door Frame
Seal" in "Rear Body".
9 Use the pry lever to pry off the roof liner clip and remove the
liner.

Assembly procedures
Note : Disconnect the battery negative
terminal before operation. Do not operate
with electricity, in order to avoid
battery short-circuit caused by personal
injury and vehicle damage。
1 Install the roof liner to the top cover and snap in the
buckle。
2 Install the back door frame seal. See "Back Door
Frame Seal"。
3 Installrear side upper interior trim panel。See“rear side
upper interior trim panel ”
4 Install the top evaporator decoration shell。
5 Install the safety handle. See "Safety handle".
6 Install interior trim panel of column B 。See“Interior trim
panel of column B”
7 Install interior trim panel of column A 。See“Interior trim
panel of column A”
8 Install the car front and rear reading light。
9 Installthe sun visor assembly 。 See“the sun visor
assembly”。

9.13.2.20 The sun visor assembly


Disassembly procedures
1 Open the sun visor assembly。
2 Remove the screw cover 1 and rotate the cover 90
degrees to make the mounting screw to leak。
3 Remove the screw cover 2。
4 Remove the bolt of the screw cover 1 and the screw
cover 2。
5 Remove the sun visor assembly

9.13.2.19 Roof lining

9-180
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

1 Aligned the mounting holes of the sun


visor assembly with the mounting holes
in the vehicle body
2 Install the bolt of the screw cover 1 and the
screw cover 2。
3 Installthe screw cover 1。
4 Install the screw cover 2。
5 Close the sun visor assembly。

9.13.2.21 Safety handle


Disassembly procedures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Rotate the safety handle upward until
the mounting seat cover is
completely leaking out
2 Use the snap-in lever to separate the
mounting plate。
3 Remove the metal clip from the safety
handle mounting point。
4 Remove the safety handle。

Assembly procedures
1 Keep the safety handle approximately
90 degrees from the mounting
place。
2 Align the safety handle with the
mounting hole on the body。
3 Snap the metal clip into the safety
handle mount place。
4 Install the seat cover plate into the
safety handle mount place。

Assembly procedures
9-181
第九章 车身和附件

9.13.2.22 Interior rear view mirrors


Disassembly procesures
1 Remove the screws on the mirror;
2 Pull Interior rear view mirrors up
along the chute。

Assembly procedures
1 Push the inner rear view mirror assembly
down along the fixed slide。
2 Install ithe nterior rear view mirror
assembly .

9.13.2.23 Carpet
Disassembly producetures
Special tool: EX-0001 buckle crow plate
1 Remove the front door threshold. See
"Front door threshold".
2 Remove the front seat assembly. See "Front
Seat Assembly"。
3 Remove the intermediate shield. See
"Intermediate shield".
4 Remove the rear door threshold. See "Back
door threshold"。
4 Remove interior lower trim panel of
column B。See “interior lower trim panel of
column B”。
5 Remove the midle row seat assembly. See
"Middle row seat assembly".
6 Remove rear side lower interior trim
panel.See“rear side lower interior trim
panel”.
7 Remove the rear seat assembly. See "Rear
Seat Assembly".
8 Use the clip levers to pry off the carpet
retention clips。
9 Remove the carpet。

9-182
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Assembly procedures
1 Install the carpet assembly to the body,
snap in the buckle and make sure it is evenly
tiled
2 Install the intermediate shield. See also
"Intermediate Shield"。
3 Install the front seat assembly. See "Front
Seat Assembly"。
4 Install interior lower trim panel of column
B。See “interior lower trim panel of column
B。
5 Install the front door threshold. See "Front
door threshold".
6 Install the back door threshold. See "Back
door threshold".
6 Install the middle row seat assembly. See
"Middle row seat assembly".
7 Install rear side lower interior trim
panel 。 See“rear side lower interior trim
panel”.
8 Install the rear seat assembly. See "Rear
Seat Assembly".

9.13.3 Special tools


Diagram Tool No./name

9-183
第九章 车身和附件

Wedge-shape crowbar

Buckle crow plate

9-184
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.14 Instrument panel, combined instrument and central shroud


9.14.1Specification
9.14.1.1 Fastener torque
Application Specification (N·m)
Application Specification (N·m)
Bolt – combined instrument cover 2~3
Bolt –upper/lower cover of the combined switch 2~3
Bolt – control cabinet body 5~7
Bolt – instrument panel 8~10
Bolt – left and right connecting plate of the
control cabinet 5~7
Bolt – Steering supporting member assembly 20~30
Screw – left and right air outlet 2~3
Screw – tool box guard board 2~3

9-185
第九章 车身和附件

9.14.2 Diagram and wiring diagram


9.14.2.1 Basic principle of instrument

Power Circuit

Singlechip Control Unit

LCD Controller

To BCM C14-
Brake pin
Oil Fluid
Pressure Level
Switch Switch Driver
From Air Bag Parking Air Bag
ACU 17-pin Brake Switch
Switch
From generator
L-pin

9-186
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

From Steering
Wheel

Vehicle RPM
Speed

CAN
Power Circuit Receiving IC Stepping Motor Driver

Singlechip Control Unit

To
Power
Lighting Control Circuit
Fuel
Signal

SBR Fuel
Front Sensor Sensor
Passenger
Air Bag From Reverse Radar
Switch Sensor

9-187
第九章 车身和附件

9.14.2.2 Comfort, luxury, intelligent instrument schematics

Power
Circuit

Singlechip Control
Unit

LCD Controller

Oil Pressure
From Air Switch
Bag ACU 17-
pin Brake Fluid Driver Air
Level Switch Bag Switch
From
Generator L-
pin

9-188
From Steering
Wheel
Vehicle RPM
Speed
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

CAN
Power Receiving IC Stepping Motor
Circuit Driver
Singlechip Control Unit
To Fuel
Signal
Lighting Control Power
Circuit

9-189
SBR Sensor Fuel
Front Sensor
Passenger Air
Bag Switch
第九章 车身和附件

9.14.2.3 Instrumentation plug-in

To Instrument Cluster

To Parking Brake Switch To Brake Fluid Level To Electronic Fuel Pump

9.14.3 Part location map


9.14.3.1 Instrument panel

9-190
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.14.3.2 Combination instrument

9-191
第九章 车身和附件

9.14.3.3 Middle shroud


Mechanical handbrake:
9-192
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Electronic hand brake:

9.14.4Diagnostic information and program


9-193
第九章 车身和附件

9.14.4.1parking indicator keeping lit up/not working


Step Remedies Yes No
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON”, check whether the
1 Step 2 Step4
parking indicator is lit up or not.
Check the
Check whether the brake fluid level is within the specified brake pipeline
2 Step3
value or not. hydraulic
system
Check whether the brake fluid warning switch is normal or Change the
3 Step4
not? switch.
Check whether the fuse IF18 of the instrument fuse box is Change the
4 Step5
normal or not.。 fuse.
Check whether the power supply and pin 17 of the Repair the
5 Step6
instrument are normal or not. wire harness.
Check
whether the
Check whether the brake fluid level warning switch and grounding
6 Step7
handbrake switch are grounded properly or not. wire is short
circuit or
broken or not.
Change
Check whether the Parking indicator (LED ) is broken or The repair
7 combination
not.。 is finished.
instrument
9.14.4.2 ABS indicator keeping lit up/not working
Step Remedies Yes No
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON”, check whether ABS
1 Step3 Step2
indicator keeps on or not.
Check whether the fuse SB3 and SB4, and F15 (the vehicle Change the
2 Step3
with ESP) are normal nor not.. fuse
Check and
Check whether the brake switch is normal or not by
3 Step4 change the
voltage method or resistance method.
brake switch
Check or
4 Check whether ABS sensor is normal or not. Step5 change ABS
sensor.
Check whether pin 1 of ABS module, fuse SB3 and SB4
circuit, pin 23 of ABS module are connected with the brake Repair wire
5 switch circuit normally or not, and whether the instrument Step6 harness or
wire harness is connected with the forecabin wire harness plug.
plug is connected correctly or not.
Check whether pin 26/14 of ABS module is connected with Repair the
6 Step 7
CAN line connection normally or not. circuit.
Check whether ABS is connected with the wire harness
7 Step 8 Change plug.
plug of each sensor normal or not.
Check
whether the
Check whether pin 13 and 38 of ABS module are grounded
8 Step 9 circuit is short
properly or not.
circuit or
broken.
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON” and check whether The repair is
9 Step 10
ABS indicator is normal or not. finished.
Check whether the fuse IF2 of the instrument fuse box is Change the
10 Step 11
normal or not.。 fuse.
9-194
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Check whether the CAN line connection is connected with Repair the
11 Step 12
pin 31 and 32 of the instrument correctly or not. wire harness.
Change
Check whether ABS indicator lampet (LED) is normal or The repair
12 combination
not. is finished
instrument
9.14.4.3 Safety airbag indicator keeping lit up/not working
Step Remedies Yes No
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON” and check whether the
1 Step2 Step4
safety airbag indicator is kept on or not.
See
“Diagnostic
2 Check whether the safety airbag system is normal or not. Step3 system of the
safety
airbag”.
Check whether the fuse IF18 of the instrument fuse box is Change the
3 Step4
normal or not.。 fuse.
Change
Check whether the instrument airbag indicator lamplet bulb The repair
4 combination
is normal or not. is finished
instrument

9.14.4.4Safety belt warning lamp keeping lit up/not working


Step Remedies Yes No
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON” and check whether the
1 Step2 Step4
safety belt warning lamp is kept on or not.
Check whether the safety belt switch and pin 4/5 of the Repair the wire
2 Step3
instrument are normal or not. harness.
Check whether the air-bag 1 harness and the air-bag 2
3 Step4 Change the plug.
harness are connected correctly or not.
Change the safety
4 Check whether the safety belt switch is normal or not. Step5
belt switch.
Check whether the
Check whether the safety belt switch is grounded properly circuit is short
5 Step6
or not. circuit or broken or
not.
Check whether the fuse IF18 of the instrument fuse box is
6 Step7 Change the fuse.
normal or not.。
Check whether the power supply module is connected with Repair the wire
7 Step8
pin 17 and 18 circuit of the instrument correctly or not.。 harness.
The repair Change combination
8 Check the safety belt warning lamp is normal or not
is finished instrument
9.14.4.5Oil pressure lamp keeping lit up/not working
Step Remedies Yes No
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON” and check the oil
1 Step2 Step6
pressure indicator is normal or not.
Check whether the fuse IF18 of the instrument fuse box is Change the
2 Step3
normal or not.。 fuse.
Check whether the power supply module is connected with Repair the
3 Step4
pin 17 and 18 of the instrument correctly or not. wire harness.
4 Check whether the oil pressure lamplet (LED) is normal or Step5 Change
not. combination
instrument

9-195
第九章 车身和附件

Start the engine and check whether the oil pressure lamp is The repair is
5 Step6
kept on or not. finished
Check whether the oil pressure switch is connected with Repair the
6 Step7
pin 1 circuit of the instrument is connected correctly or not. wire harness.
Check the cab wire harness is connected with the forecabin Change the
7 Step8
wire harness plug correctly or not. plug.
See “Engine
8 Check the oil pressure switch. Step9 module
diagnosis”.
Check
whether the
Check whether the grounding wire is grounded properly or The repair grounding
9 not. is finished wire is short
circuit or
broken

9.14.4.6Engine fault lamp keeping lit up/not working


Step Remedies Yes No
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON” and check the engine
1 Step2 Step6
fault indicator is normal or not .
Check whether fuse IF12 and IF18 of the fuse box are Change the
2 Step3
normal or not. fuse.
Check whether the power supply module is connected with Repair the wire
3 Step4
pin 17 and 18circuit of the instrument correctly or not.。 harness.
Change
Check whether the lamplet bulb (LED) for engine fault is
4 Step5 combination
normal or not.
instrument
Turn on the ignition switch to “START” to start the vehicle
5 Step6 Step3
and check whether the engine fault lamp is normal or not.
See “Engine
The repair
6 Check the engine fault system. module
is finished
diagnosis”.
9.14.4.7 Charge indicator keeping lit up/not working
Step Remedies Yes No
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON” and check the charge
1 Step2 Step6
indicator is normal or not (lit up).
Check whether the fuse IF18 of the instrument fuse box is Change the
2 Step3
normal or not.。 fuse.
Check whether the power supply module is connected with Repair the wire
3 Step4
pin 17 and 18 circuit of the instrument correctly or not.。 harness.
Change
Check whether the charge indicator lamplet bulb is normal
4 Step5 combination
or not.
instrument
Turn on the ignition switch “START” to start the engine Repair it.
5 Step6
and check whether the charge indicator is normal or not.
See “Generator
6 Check the generator operation. Step7
check”.
See
7 Check the accumulator operation. Step8 “Accumulator
check”.”
See “Starter
8 Check the starter operation. Step9
check”.

9-196
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Check whether the circuit from the ignition switch to the


starter, circuit from the accumulator to the starter and Check the
9 Repair it.
circuit from the starter to the generator are connected circuit.
correctly or not.

9.14.4.8Left and right turn signal


Step Remedies Yes No
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON” and check whether Change the
1 Step2
fuseIF2/IF5/IF18 of the fuse box are normal or not. fuse.
Check whether pin 21/22 of the instrument are grounded Check the
2 Step3
properly or not. circuit.
Check whether pin 2 of the warning switch is connected Check the
3 Step4
with pin C27 of body controller normally or not. circuit.
Change the
Turn on the warning switch and check whether pin 1and
4 Step5 warning
pin 4 of the warning switch is connected correctly or not.
switch.
Check whether the pin D6 of body controlleris connected Check the
5 Step6
with combination switch normally or not . circuit.
Check CAN lin is connected with the pin 31/32 of Repair the wire
6 Step7
instruments normally or not . harness.
Change
7 Check Left and right turn signal is normally or not . Repair it. combination
instrument

9.14.4.9Front fog lamp instrument indicator not lit up


Step Remedies Yes No
Check whether the front fog lamp fuse F11 and relay of the Change the
1 Step2
forecabin fuse box are normal or not. fuse or relay.
Check the pin 3 of the combination switch is connected Check the wire
2 Step3
with the pin D6 of the body controller normally or not . harness.
Check whether the forecabin wire harness plug and cab Change the
3 Step4
wire harness plug are normal or not. plug.
Check whether pin 21/22 of the instrument are grounded Check the
4 Step5
properly or not. circuit.
Check CAN lin is connected with the pin 31/32 of Check the wire
5 Step6
instruments normally or not . harness.
Check voltage on pin 1/9 of the front fog lamp switch.
Change the
6 When turning on the switch, the voltage is normal value. Step7
switch.
When turning off the switch, the voltage is decreased.
Change
7 Check whether the front fog indicator bulb is normal or not. Repair it. combination
instrument

9.14.4.10Rear fog lamp indicator not lit up


Step Remedies Yes No
Check whether the inner rear fog lamp fuse IF12 of the cab Change the
1 Step 2
fuse box and relay is normal or not.。 fuse and relay
Check the pin 3 of the combination awitch is connected Check the wire
2 Step3
with the pin D6 body controller normally or not . harness
Check rear fuse wire harness and chassis wire harness and Change the
3 Step 4
cab wire harness plug are normal or not . plug

9-197
第九章 车身和附件

Check whether pin 21/22 of the instrument are grounded Check the
4 Step 5
properly or not. circuit.
Check CAN lin is connected with the pin 31/32 of
5 Step 6 Repair it
instruments normally or not .。
Check voltage on pin 1/9 of the rear fog lamp switch. When
Change the
6 turning on the switch, the voltage is normal value. When Step7
switch
turning off the switch, the voltage is decreased.
Change
7 Check whether the rear fog indicator bulb is normal or not. Repair it. combination
instrument

9.14.4.11Passing beam and high beam instrument indicator not lit up


Step Remedies Yes No
Turn on the ignition switch to “ON” and check fuse
Change the
1 IF2、IF18、F5、F9 of the forecabin fuse box and lamplet Step2
fuse and relay
relay.
Check whether pin 21/22 of the instrument are grounded Check the
2 Step4
properly or not. circuit.
Check the pin 3 of the combination awitch is connected Check the wire
3 Step3
with the pin D6 body controller normally or not . harness
Check whether the forecabin wire harness plug and cab Change the
4 Step7
wire harness plug are normal or not. plug
Check CAN lin is connected with the pin 31/32 of
5 Step6 Repair it
instruments normally or not .。
Check voltage on pin 1/9 of the rear fog lamp switch. When
Change the
6 turning on the switch, the voltage is normal value. When Step7
switch
turning off the switch, the voltage is decreased.
Change
Check whether Passing beam and high beam instrument
7 Step 8 combination
indicator is normal or not.
instrument

9.14.4.12 Instrument backlight not lit up


Step Remedies Yes No
Open the lampet switch and check fuse IF5 IF2 IF18 of the Change the
1 Step2
forecabin is normal or not. fuse.
Check whether pin 21/22 of the instrument are grounded Check the
2 Step3
properly or not. circuit.
Check the
3 Check whether the switchis grounded properly or not. Step4
circuit.
Check whether the forecabin wire harness plug and cab Check the
4 Step 5
wire harness plug are normal or not. circuit.
Check CAN lin is connected with the pin 31/32 of Repire the wire
5 Step 6
instruments normally or not .。 harness
Check whether the instrument backlight is normal or not Change
6 Repair it. combination
instrument

9.14.4.13 Speed meter/odometer not working


Step Remedies Yes No
Check whether fuse IF18 and IF02 of the instrument are Change the
1 Step 2
normal or not. fuse.

9-198
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Check CAN lin is connected with the pin 31/32 of Check the
2 Step 3
instruments normally or not .。 circuit.
Check the forecabin wire harness and engine wire harness
3 plug and check whether the instrument wire harness and Step 4 Check the plug
forecabin wire harness plug are normal or not.
Check whether the front left wheel spped sensor of ABS is Change the
4 Step 5
normal or not . sensor
Check whether pin 21/22 of the instrument are grounded Check the
5 Repair it
properly or not. circuit.

9.14.4.14Fuel meter does not operate


Step Remedies Yes No
Check whether the fuse IF18/IF02 of the instrument is Change the
1 Step 2
normal or not. fuse.
Check CAN lin is connected with the pin 31/32 of Check the
2 Step 3
instruments normally or not .。 circuit.
Check whether the plug of the cab wire harness and the
3 Step 4 Check sensor
chassis wire harness .
Check the
4 Check whether the fuel sensor is normal or not. Step 5
sensor.
Check whether the fuel sensor is connected with pin 23/24 Check the wire
5 Step 6
of the instrument correctly or not. harness.
Check whether
Check whether pin 21/22 of the instrument are grounded the wire is short
6 Repair it.
properly or not. circuit or
broken.

9.14.4.15Water temperature not working


Step Remedies Yes No
Check whether the fuse IF18/IF02 of the instrument is Change the
1 Step2
normal or not. fuse.
Check whether pin 17/18 of the instrument and the Check the
2 Step3
instrument fuse box circuit are normal or not.。 circuit
Check the cab wire harness and forecabin wire harness
3 Step4 Check the plug.
plug.
4 Check the forecabin wire harness and engine harness plug. Step5 Check the plug.
Check whether the water temperature sensor is normal or Check the
5 Step6
not. sensor
Check CAN lin is connected with the pin 31/32 of Check the
6 Step7
instruments normally or not .。 circuit.
Check whether
Check whether pin 21/22 of the instrument are grounded the wire is
7 Repair it.
properly or not. short circuit or
broken.
9.14.4.16 Speedometer not working
Step Remedies Yes No
Check whether the fuse IF08/IF02 of the instrument is
1 Step2 Change the fuse.
normal or not
2 Check whether pin 32 and 33 of the instrument and the Step 3 Check the circuit.
instrument fuse box circuit are normal or not.。
3 Check the cab wire harness and forecabin wire harness Step 4 Check the plug.

9-199
第九章 车身和附件

plug.
4 Check the forecabin wire harness and engine harness plug. Step 5 Check the plug.
Check CAN lin is connected with the pin 31/32 of
5 Step 6 Check the circuit.
instruments normally or not .。
See “Engine
6 Check the engine rotation speed. Step 7 module
diagnosis”.
Check whether
Check whether pin 21/22 of the instrument are grounded
7 Repair it. the wire is short
properly or not.
circuit or broken.
Note : If another fault warning lamp of instrucment (Cruise indicator/Start and stop indicator/
ESP indicator/ tire pressure indicator/ EPS indicator/ electronic hand brake indicator)
doesn`t work , please use the diagnostic apparatus to read the the fault code to solve .
Instrument fault code please see the “Instrucment Diagnostic Code (IC DTC) “in the
“9.22.1Subsystem Diagnostic Code”of “9.22 Electrical system diagnostic code list”.

9-200
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.14.5.1 Combined instrument


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the instrument cluster cover from
the instrument panel using the flat blade
tool;
2 Remove the screw between the instrument
cluster and the instrument panel;
3 Loosen the node between the instrument
panel and remove the instrument cluster。

Assembly procedures:
1Assemble the combined instrument cover
into the instrument panel.
2 Use a screwdriver to tighten the screw
between the instrument panel;
3 Install the instrument cluster cover。

9.14.5.2 Combined switch upper/lower


cover
Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the steering wheelassembly .
2Remove screws of the lower cover and
upper cover of the combined switch,
steering column and the combined
switch.
3 Loosen the connecting points of the lower
cover and upper cover of the combined
switch.

9.14.5 Maintenance guidance


9-201
第九章 车身和附件

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the lower cover and upper
cover of the combined switch to the steering
column.
2 Assemble the screws of the lower cover
and upper cover of the combined
switch, steering column and the
combined switch.
3 Assemble the steering wheel assembly.

9.14.5.3 12V car power supply


Disassembly procedures:
Note: Before operation, firstly
disconnect the negative pole terminal of
the accumulator. Don’t operate under
live condition to avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage due to short circuit
of the accumulator.。
1 Use the flat blade tool to remove the
cigarette lighter cover assembly from the
control box body and the instrument panel
body。
2 Remove the 12V car power connector。
3 Remove the 12V car power supply from
the cigarette lighter cover。

Assembly procedures:
Note: Before operation, firstly
disconnect the negative pole terminal of
the accumulator. Don’t operate under
live condition to avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage due to short circuit
of the accumulator.。
1 Mount the 12V car power supply to the
cigarette lighter cover。
2Mounted 12V car power connector.
3Insert the cigarette lighter cover assembly
into the control box body.

9-202
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Mechanical handbrake:
Disassembly procedures:
Note : Disconnect the battery
negative terminal before
operation. Please do not live
operation, so as to avoid battery
short-circuit caused by personal
injury and vehicle damage。
1 Remove the cigarette lighter cover from the
control cabinet body with flat-edge tool。
2 Remove the electric connector of the cigarette
lighter.
3 Remove the cigarette lighter and disassemble
the fixed part for assembly of the cigarette lighter
from the cover

Assembly procedures:
Note: Before operation, firstly
disconnect the negative pole terminal of
the accumulator. Don’t operate under
live condition to avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage due to short circuit
of the accumulator.。
1. Assemble fixed part of the cigarette
lighter on the cigarette lighter cover.
2. Assemble the electric connector of the
cigarette lighter.
3. Assemble the cigarette lighter cover into
the control cabinet body.
4. Insert the cigarette lighter into the fixed
part for assembly of the cigarette lighter.

Electronic hand brake:


Disassembly procedures
Note : Disconnect the battery
negative terminal before
operation. Please do not live
operation, so as to avoid battery
short-circuit caused by personal
injury and vehicle damage。
1 Remove the cigarette lighter cover from the
control cabinet body with flat-edge tool。
2 Remove the electric connector of the cigarette
lighter.
3 Remove the cigarette lighter and disassemble
the fixed part for assembly of the cigarette lighter
from the cover

9.14.5.4 Cigarette lighter assembly


9-203
第九章 车身和附件

Note: Before operation, firstly


disconnect the negative pole terminal of
the accumulator. Don’t operate under
live condition to avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage due to short circuit
of the accumulator.。
1. Assemble fixed part of the cigarette
lighter on the cigarette lighter cover.
2. Assemble the electric connector of the
cigarette lighter.
3. Assemble the cigarette lighter cover into
the control cabinet body.
4. Insert the cigarette lighter into the fixed
part for assembly of the cigarette lighter.

9.14.5.5 Tool box assembly


Disassembly procedures:
1 Open the tool box (according to the diagram).
2 Hold the both sides of the tool box by hands and
pull it up powerfully to separate the axial point
from the instrument panel.
3 Take out the tool box from the instrument panel.

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the tool box into the instrument panel
according to the diagram.
2. Align the axial point of the tool box with the
axial point of the instrument panel and put it into.
3. Close the tool box.

Assembly procedures:
9-204
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Disassembly procedures:
1Remove the instrument panel assembly.
See “instrument panel assembly”.
2 Remove the air conditioning duct.
3 Remove the central trim panel (right).
4 Remove the instrument cluster cover.
5 Remove side air outlet。

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the left and right air outlets on
the air conditioner to the instrument panel.
2 Assemble the air conditioning duct.
3 Assemble the instrument cluster cover.
4 Assemble the central trim panel (right).
5 Assemble the instrument panel assembly.
See “instrument panel assembly”.

9.14.5.7 Central air outlet assembly


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the instrument panel assembly.
See “instrument panel assembly”.
2Remove the air conditioning duct.
3Remove the central trim panel (right).
4 Remove the instrument cluster cover.
5 Remove Central air outlet assembly

9.14.5.6 Side air outlet assembly


9-205
第九章 车身和附件

Assembly procedures:
1 Assemble the left and right air outlets on
the air conditioner to the instrument panel.
2 Assemble the air conditioning duct.
3 Assemble the instrument cluster cover.
4 Assemble the central trim panel (right).
5 Assemble the instrument panel assembly.
See “instrument panel assembly”.

9.14.5.8 Middle shroud


Note: Before operation, firstly disconnect the
negative pole terminal of the accumulator. Don't
operate under live condition to avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage due to short circuit of
the accumulator.
Mechanical handbrake:
Disassembly procedures:
1. Remove the ashtray assembly.
2. Remove the cigarette lighter cover assembly. See “Cigarette
lighter cover assembly”.
3 Remove the shift mechanism panel assembly.
4 Remove the control box front storage box.
5 Remove the connecting plate of the control cabinet. See
“Connecting plate of the control cabinet”.
6 Remove the control cabinet cover. See “Control cabinet
cover”.
7 Remove the rear control cabinet cover.
8 Unscrew fixing bolt of the middle shroud.
9 Remove the control cabinet assembly.
10 Remove the control box decorative pieces and handrails
and storage box assembly.

Assembly procedures:
Note: Before operation, firstly disconnect the
negative pole terminal of the accumulator. Don't
operate under live condition to avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage due to short circuit of
the accumulator.
1 Install the control box decorative pieces and handrails and
storage box assembly.
2 Assemble the control cabinet body to the central shroud.
3 Assemblefixing bolt of the middle shroud
4 Assemble the rear control cabinet cover.
5 Assemble the control cabinet cover. See “Control cabinet
cover”.
6 Assemble the connecting plate of the control cabinet. See
“Connecting plate of the control cabinet”.
7 Assemble the control box front storage box.
8 Assemble the shift mechanism panel assembly.
9 Assemble the cigarette lighter cover assembly. See
“Cigarette lighter cover assembly”.
10 Assemble the ashtray assembly.

9-206
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the ashtray assemblyAshtray base
assembly and ashtray components.
2Remove the control panel large panel
assembly.
3 Remove the control box trim assembly.
4Remove the connecting plate of the control
cabinet. See “Connecting plate of the
control cabinet”.
5Removethecigarette lighter cover
assembly. See “Cigarette lighter cover
assembly”.
6Remove the control box shift mechanism
base assembly.
7 Remove the rear control cabinet cover.
8 Unscrew fixing bolt of the middle shroud.
9 Remove the control cabinet assembly.
10Remove the control box decorative pieces
and handrails and storage box assembly.
Assembly procedures:
Note: Before operation, firstly disconnect the
negative pole terminal of the accumulator. Don't
operate under live condition to avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage due to short circuit of
the accumulator.
1 Install control box armrest assembly and storage
box assembly.
2 Install the control box assembly to the
intermediate shroud。
3 Assemble fixing bolt of the middle shroud .
4 Assemble the rear control cabinet cover.
5 Assemble the control box shift mechanism base
assembly .
6 Assemble the cigarette lighter cover assembly.
See “Cigarette lighter cover assembly”.
7 Assemble the connecting plate of the control
cabinet. See “Connecting plate of the control
cabinet”.
8 Assemble the control box trim assembly.
9 Assemble the control panel large panel
assembly。
10 Assemble the ashtray assemblyAshtray base
assembly and ashtray components.
9.14.5.9 Danger alarm switch
Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the central air outlet assembly.
See "Central Vent Assembly".
2 Remove danger alarm switch。

Electronic hand brake:


9-207
第九章 车身和附件

central air outlet assembly.


2 Install the central air outlet assembly to
the central outlet assembly. See "Central
Vent Assembly".
9.14.5.10 Instrument panel assembly
Disassembly procedures:
Note: Before operation, firstly disconnect the
negative pole terminal of the accumulator. Don't
operate under live condition to avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage due to short circuit of
the accumulator.
1 Remove the central control panel
assembly.
2 Remove the air conditioning control
panel and components
3 Remove the center cover. See also
"Intermediate Shroud".
4 Remove the lower control panel cover.
5 Remove the left and right panel cover
assembly.
6 Remove the HVAC connection bolts to
the floor.
7 Remove the instrument panel assembly
and body bolts.
8 Disconnect the cab harness connector.
9 Remove the instrument panel assembly.
A©ssembly procedures:
Note: Before operation, firstly disconnect the
negative pole terminal of the accumulator. Don't
operate under live condition to avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage due to short circuit of
the accumulator.
1 Put the dashboard assembly on the car body.
2 Connect the cab harness connector.
3 Tighten the dash panel assembly to the body
bolts.
4 Tighten the HVAC connection bolts to the floor.
5 Install the instrument panel left and right end
cover assembly.
6 Install the instrument panel center control lower
cover.
7 Install the intermediate shroud. See "Intermediate
Shroud".
8 Install the air conditioning control panel and
components .
9 Install the center control panel assembly.

Assembly procedures:
1 Install the hazard alarm switch to the
9-208
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

拆卸程序
1. Disassemble the control cabinet cover from the
control cabinet body with flat-edge tool.
2. Remove the control cabinet cover.

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the control cabinet cover to the control
cabinet body.
2. Insert the buckle to ensure flat and firm
assembly.

9.14.5.12 Connecting plate of the


control cabinet
Mechanical handbrake:
Disassembly procedures:
1. Disassemble the fixing clip and the connecting
plate from the instrument panel with tool.
2. Remove the connecting plate of the control
cabinet.

Assembly procedures:
1 Snap in the retaining clip.
2 Install the control box connection plate
to the control box body.

Electronic hand brake:


Disassembly procedures:
1. Disassemble the fixing clip and the connecting
plate from the instrument panel with tool.
2. Remove the connecting plate of the control
cabinet.

Assembly procedures:
1 Snap in the retaining clip.
2 Install the control box connection plate
to the control box body.

9.14.5.11 Control cabinet cover


9-209
第九章 车身和附件

Disassembly procedures:
1. Prize up it along the end cover edge with
flat-edge tool.
2. Remove the end cover form the
instrument panel.

Assembly procedures:
1 Snap in the clip to install the left and right
end covers.
2 Install left/right end cover of the
instrument panel。

9.14.5.14 Lower guard plate of the


steering wheel
Disassembly procedures:
1 Prize up it along the end cover edge with
flat-edge tool.
2 Remove the Lower guard plate of the
steering wheelfrom instrument panel.
3Remove the Inspection cover
assemblyfrom the Lower guard plate of the
steering wheel.
4 Use the special tool to loosen the
connection screw of the access panel and
access door。
Assembly procedures:
1 Use special tools to tighten the access port
cover and the access floor
Connect the screws。
2 Install the service cover assembly to the
lower left cover assembly of the instrument
panel.
3 Insert the plastic clip into the lower left
cover of the instrument panel.
4 Install the instrument panel lower left
cover assembly to the instrument panel.
9.14.5.15 Side defroster door
Disassembly procedures:
1. Prize up it along the side defroster door with flat-
edge tool.
Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the side defroster door to the
instrument panel.

9.14.5.13 Left/right end cover of the


instrument panel
9-210
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Disassembly procedures:
1. Prize up it along the safety airbag cover with flat-
edge tool.
2. Remove the safety airbag cover from the
instrument panel.
Assembly procedures:
1 Insert the fixing clip.
2 Assemble the safety airbag to the instrument
panel.
9.14.5.17 Tool box guard plate
Disassembly procedures:
1 Open the toolbox assembly at an angle
and remove the toolbox assembly.
2 Loosen the connecting bolts of the toolbox
guard assembly and the steering support
assembly with a special tool.
3 Remove the dashboard small assembly.
See "Dashboard small assembly".
4 Use the special tool to loosen the
connection screw of the toolbox guard
assembly and instrument panel body.
5 Remove the toolbox guard assembly.
Assembly procedures:
1 Install the toolbox guard assembly.
2 Tighten the connection screws of the
toolbox guard assembly to the instrument
panel body with special tools.
3 Install the dashboard small assembly. See
"Dashboard small assembly".
4Tighten the connection bolts of the toolbox
guard assembly to the steering support
assembly with special tools。
5 Install the Toolbox Assembly to the
Toolbox Guard Plate Assembly.
9.14.5.18 Shift mechanism large
panel assembly and shift mechanism
cover
Disassembly procedures:
Note: Before operation, firstly disconnect the
negative pole terminal of the accumulator. Don't
operate under live condition to avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage due to short circuit of
the accumulator.
1 Use the flat blade tool to separate the shift mechanism cover
from the shift mechanism large panel assembly and shift
mechanism.
2 The shift mechanism large panel assembly and the control
box body separation.
3 Remove the shift mechanism large panel assembly.

9.14.5.16 Safety airbag cover


9-211
第九章 车身和附件

Note: Before operation, firstly


disconnect the negative pole terminal of
the accumulator. Don't operate under
live condition to avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage due to short circuit
of the accumulator.
1 Install the clip to the control panel large
panel.
2 And the connection clamp of the shift
mechanism large panel assembly to the
control box body is pressed.
3 Install the shift mechanism cover in the
appropriate position.

9.14.5.19Switch mounting plate


assembly
Disassembly procedures:
Note: Before operation, firstly disconnect the
negative pole terminal of the accumulator. Don't
operate under live condition to avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage due to short circuit of
the accumulator.
1 Use the flat blade tool to separate the clip
from the lower left cover of the instrument
panel to the instrument panel body.
2Use the special tool to loosen the
connecting screw of switch mounting plate
assembly and instrument panel body.
3 Disconnect the electrical connector.
4Remove the switch mounting plate
assembly.
Assembly procedures:
Note: Before operation, firstly disconnect the
negative pole terminal of the accumulator. Don’t
operate under live condition to avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage due to short circuit of
the accumulator.
1. Assemble the switch mounting plate
assembly to the instrument panel body.
2. Connect the relevant electric connector.
3. Press the connecting clip of the switch
mounting plate assembly and instrument
panel body.
4 Tighten the connecting screws of switch
mounting plate assembly and instrument
panel body with special tools.

Assembly procedures:
9-212
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9-213
第九章 车身和附件

9.15 Amusement system


9.15.1Specification
9.15.1.1 Fastener torque specification

Application Specification (N·m)


Radio seat bolt/screw 1.7~2.3
Radio antenna bolt/screw 1.0~1.5
Radio front side door loudspeaker bolt/screw 1.1~1.5
Radio front high pitch loudspeaker bolt/screw 1.5~3.0
Radio rear side door loudspeaker bolt/screw 0.9~1.3

9.15.2Diagram and wiring diagram


9.15.2.1 Diagram of the radio/acoustic system

FR Camera RR Camera LH Camera RH Camera To


From Brake
BCM Lamp
D6-pin Switch
GND
AVM Controller Vehicle Running GND
Recorder (Camera) DATA
POWER
Vehicle Running
Rain/Light
Recorder
Sensor
GND
GPS Antenna POWER
Antenna DATA
POWER
RR LH MID ML
GND
DATA
DATA
POWER
RR RH MID MR

GND
EMPTY
DATA
POWER
RR Speaker +

RR Speaker +

RR Speaker +

RR Speaker +
RR Speaker -

RR Speaker -

RR Speaker -

RR Speaker -

RR RH R

Clock Spring

USB2.0/AUX Port
Steering Wheel

RH RR Speaker RH FR Speaker LH FR HIGH-PITCH SPEAKER


RH FR HIGH-PITCH SPEAKER LH FR Speaker LH RR Speaker

9-214
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Socket Function Color Function Color

Socket Function

9.15.3 Acoustic system


9.15.3.1 Diagram of the acoustic system assembly components

Legend:
1. MP5 player
2 In the control panel

9-215
第九章 车身和附件

Legend:
1. MP5 player
2 In the control panel

9-216
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.15.3.2 Diagram of front door loudspeaker components

Legend:
1. Front door loudspeaker
2. Front door loudspeaker fixing bolt/screw
3. Door wire harness
4. Front door

9-217
第九章 车身和附件

9.15.3.3 Diagram of rear door loudspeaker components

Legend:
1. Rear door loudspeaker
2. Rear door loudspeaker fixing bolt/screw
3. Wire harness
4. Rear door

9-218
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.15.3.4 Diagram of the high pitch loudspeaker components

Legend:
1. High pitch loudspeaker assembly
2. High pitch louder speaker hole cover
3 A pillar shield

9-219
第九章 车身和附件

9.15.4Diagnostic information and program


9.15.4.1 Diagnostic system operation of radio/acoustic system

Step Remedies Normal result Abnormal result


The radio display
cannot operate.
The radio can be used. All
Turn on the ignition switch to The radio memory
1 the loudspeakers are
“ACC” and turn on the radio. cannot operate.
normal.
The radio cannot
operate.
The radio display becomes
When the parking lamp
Turn the electric lamp switch to dark.
2 is lit up, the radio
“Off”. The radio panel is lit up.
lighting cannot operate.
The radio button is lit up.
Tape/disc player cannot
3 nsert tape/disc into the radio. Tape/disc is not normal.
operate.
Find the abnormal operation result in the list of the corresponding diagnostic troubles.

9.15.4.2 Poor reception effect of the radio


Step Operation Value Yes No
To the
diagnostic
1 Check the operation system. - Step 2
system
operation
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Use one digital universal meter to connect one
end with the constant power supply terminal of the
2 12V Step 4 Step 3
antenna amplifier and another terminal with the
grounding wire, and then measure whether the
voltage is equal to the conventional value or not.
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Use one digital universal meter to connect one
terminal with constant power supply terminal (pin
3 12V Step 5 Step 6
A08) and another terminal with the grounding wire
(pin A07), and then measure whether the voltage is
equal to the conventional value or not.
Check whether the signal cable between the
4 antenna amplifier and radio is normal or not and - Step 7 Step 8
the coaxial cable is normal or not.
Repair the open circuit between the constant power
supply terminal of the antenna amplifier and See the
5 constant power supply terminal (pin A08) of the - system -
radio, and then check whether the coaxial cable is operatio
normal or not.
Repair the open circuit between the constant power
The system
6 supply terminal and battery, and then check the - Step 9
is normal.
abnormal condition is eliminated or not.
See the
Change the antenna amplifier. See “Repair
7 - system -
procedures for change of the antenna amplifier”.
operation
8 Change the signal cable. See “Repair procedures - See the -
for change of the signal cable” and finish the repair. system

9-220
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

operation
See the
Change the radio. See “Repair procedures for
9 - system -
change of the radio” and finish the repair.
operation
If you are in remote mountains or tunnel, your radio signal may be poor.

9.15.4.3 Radio displays not working

Step Operation Value Yes No


To the
1 The operation system is checked? - Step 2 system
operation
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ACC” or “ON”.
2 2. Turn on the radio and check whether there is any - Step 3 Step 4
sound from the loudspeaker or not.
Change the radio. See “Repair procedures for change
The system is
3 of the radio” and check whether the state is resumed - Step 6
normal.
or not.
Use one digital universal meter to connect one
terminal with the radio power supply (pin A03) and
4 another terminal with the grounding wire (pin A07) 12V Step 3 Step 5
and measure whether the voltage is equal to the
specified value or not.
Check the fuse or repair the open circuit between the See the
5 radio power supply and ignition power supply, and - system -
check whether the repair is finished or not. operation
Check whether the circuit between the loudspeaker
6 - Step 7 Step 8
and ratio is broken or not.
See the
Repair the open circuit between the loudspeaker and
7 - system -
ratio and check whether the repair is finished or not.
operation
See the
Change the loudspeaker. See “Repair procedures for
8 - system -
change of the loudspeaker”.
operation

9.15.4.4 Radio control panel backlight not working

Step Operation Value Yes No


1. Turn the ignition switch to “ACC”.
1 2. Measure pin A04 and grounding with testing lamp - Step 3 Step 2
or backlight and check whether they are lit up or not.
Repair the open circuit between pin A04 and ignition See the system
2 - -
switch and check whether the state is normal or not. operation
Change the radio. See “Repair procedures for change
See the system
3 of the radio” and check whether the repair is finished - -
operation
or not.

9.15.4.5 Radio memory not operating

Step Operation Value Yes No


1 Measure pin A08 and grounding with testing lamp or - Step 3 Step 2

9-221
第九章 车身和附件

backlight and check the testing lamp is lit up.


Repair the open circuit between pin A08 and battery See the system
2 - -
(+) and check the state is resumed or not. operation
Change the radio. See “Repair procedures for change
See the system
3 of the radio” and check whether the repair is finished - -
operation
or not.

9-222
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.15.4.6 General diagnosis of the range. The tone sounds like a group of crickets.
loudspeaker There are two reasons to use 9kHz frequency
Amusement system diagnosis: General methods tone:
of the loudspeaker The sound source is similar to the trill.
Necessary tools: J 39916-A CD and tape It is easier to identify for the person suffered from
diagnostic tool kit high-end hearing disease.
Important precautions: Compare the front
loudspeaker to other loudspeakers and the rear Testing of all the loudspeakers
loudspeaker to other loudspeakers. Don't The mixed sound can be used to eliminate numerous
compare the front loudspeaker to the rear acoustic troubles:
loudspeaker. The reason is as follows: The sound from the loudspeaker is distorted.
The front and rear loudspeakers may be When using mixed sound if there is not sound from
different type. Different mounting environment the loudspeaker, so long as the following controller
of the front and rear loudspeakers may cause is located at stop position, it is possible to measure
different acoustic effect. Test and evaluate tone AC voltage at the terminal of the loudspeaker.
of the following parts: Voltage measurement can be used to determine
The coaxial loudspeaker and other trouble of the following parts:
complicated loudspeaker systems are provided Loudspeaker
with the three basic tones: Amplifier
50 Hz Sine tone Loudspeaker/grid acoustic measurement
500 Hz Trill (50Hz~8kHz scanning sine wave)
9 kHz Spectrum tone Diagnosis of the next part of tapes is used to detect
The compound tone is mixed tone of the “chick” in the following parts:
above three tones. Loudspeaker
Low pitch/subsidiary low pitch speaker Grid
testing (50Hz sine tone) The first testing is repeated play of two tones.
The second testing is one variable frequency tone but
For 50Hz sine tone, the following items the variable speed of the frequency is rather slow. In
shall be evaluated: Low pitch frequency order to repair the following problems, the two
characteristic of the acoustic system with testing may be performed:
separate subsidiary low pitch loudspeaker Chick sound from the loudspeaker
amplifier and intermediate frequency Hum from the loudspeaker: If the reason is
loudspeaker of the loudspeaker acoustic system found out, finish the following steps:
shall be tested (500Hz trill). Set the controller to the suitable position:
For 500Hz trill, the frequency response of Attenuation balance: The specific zone is used to
the intermediate frequency loudspeaker shall be play and test the tone. Motor speed testing is used to
evaluated. Compare it to the sine tone, 500Hz check motor speed of the cassette tape. This part of
trill can provide different acoustic tape is marked with one two minutes of period of
characteristics. Therefore, it can be used as a time. Diagnostic tape may be used to verify
testing trill. 500Hz trill can produce trill. The abnormal sound from the tape player. Under some
intermediate frequency part uses trill instead of condition, unstable tape speed may cause sound
sine tone because the trill source position of the distortion. If the time for motor speed testing is 116s
loudspeaker is easier to be identified. Normal ~ 121s, then the tape motor speed is within the
sine tone can set up stationary wave in the tolerance.
automobile, which may increase difficulty to
determine the sound source position. Noise diagnosis (mute interval)
High frequency loudspeaker testing (9kHz This part may be used to diagnose tingle from
spectrum tone) AC generator and switch noise, which are easier to
9kHz frequency tone is used to following find in the mute interval. The mute interval is blank
evaluations: space between two songs. This part may be used to
High frequency loudspeaker assist noise diagnosis in “electric diagnosis of the
High frequency radio”.
9 kHz spectrum tone has equal amplitude
frequency within 8.5kHz ~ 9.5 kHz frequency

9-223
第九章 车身和附件

9.15.5Maintenance guidance
9.15.5.1 How to change the high pitch
loudspeaker
Disassembly procedures:
1 RemoveInterior trim panel of column A
assembly . See “Interior trim panel of
column A assembly”
2 Unplug the high pitch loudspeaker plug.
3 Remove the screws that secure the
speakers to the Interior trim panel of
column A .
4 Remove the high pitch loudspeaker.
Assembly procedures:
1 Fasteningthe screws that secure the
speakers to the Interior trim panel of
column A .
2 Install the high pitch loudspeaker plug.
3 Install Interior trim panel of column A
assembly . See “Interior trim panel of
column A assembly”

9.15.5.2 How to change the front door


loudspeaker
Disassembly procedures:
1. Remove the front / rear door interior trim panel.
See “Front / rear door interior trim panel”.
2. Remove the four screws of the front / rear door
loudspeaker cover.
3. Move the loudspeaker and pull out the
loudspeaker plug.
4. Remove the front / rear door loudspeaker.
Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the loudspeaker plug.
2. Assemble the front / rear door loudspeaker.
3. Fix the loudspeaker screw tightly.
4. Assemble the front / rear door interior trim panel.
See “Front door / rear interior trim panel”.

9-224
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.15.5.3 How to change MP5


Disassembly procedures:
1. Remove the central control panel of the
instrument panel. See “Central control panel of the
instrument panel”.
2. Remove the four screws fixing MP5 on the
instrument panel.
3. Move MP5 outward and disconnect the plug and
antenna power supply.
4. Remove MP5.

Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble MP5.
2. Assemble MP5 plug and antenna power supply.
3. Fix the four screws fixing MP5 on the instrument
panel.
4. Assemble the central control panel in the
instrument panel. See “How to change the central
control panel of the instrument panel”.

9-225
第九章 车身和附件

9.15.5.4 Antennas and feeders


Disassembly procedures:
1 Remove the Interior trim panel of
column A (RH) , see “Interior trim panel
of column A”
2 Pull down the right side of the roof
lining.
3 Remove the clips on the body of the
feeder body.
4 Remove the antenna feeder and
instrument feeder feeder connector.
5 Pull down the top part of the liner
after a certain space, unplug the antenna
and back door wiring harness connectors,
and feeder connectors.
6 Loosen the lower part of the antenna
with a wrench.
7 Pull the antenna mount upward from the
roof.

Assembly procedures:
1 Install the antenna mount.
2 Pull down the top liner to a certain
space. Connect the antenna to the feeder
and back door harness connectors and
secure.
3 Fixed the feed line in the body of the
buckle point.
4 Connect the feeder to the instrument
cluster connector and secure it.
5 Install the roof liner, see "Fitting
the roof lining".
6 Install the A-pillar trim panel, see
"A-pillar trim panel".

9-226
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.15.6 Description and troubleshooting of press to select the next folder;


the keys 10、MUTE Mute key;
9.15.6.1 Radio + MP3 player with USB 11、LCD display;
interface 12 、 Short press in the radio mode to
recall the station number 4, long press to
store the fourth station; MP3 mode short
press preview every song before 10S,
preview playback status short press to
exit the preview;
13、CLK clock button
14 、 Short press in radio mode to recall
1 、 Power switch / volume knob; play the station number 5, long press to store
clockwise rotation to increase the the fifth station; MP3 mode short press to
volume, counterclockwise rotation to enter the random play state, random play
reduce the volume, short press the status short press to exit the random;
boot down state, boot short press the 15、Short press in the radio mode to
shutdown, long press more than 10S recall the station number 6, long press to
machine reset; store the sixth station; MP3 mode short
2、Rotate the knob to keep 2S into the press to enter the single cycle state,
step FM mode, do not operate more than single cycle short press the exit cycle;
5S to exit the step frequency 16、Short press to browse the stored
modulation (FM), and then turn the stations, long press to automatically
knob to select the next song, turn the search and store the station.
knob clockwise to select the next Simple troubleshooting guidance
song, Mode, press the button to enter 1) The antenna length
the SEL mode, each short-press to is not suitable. Check
enter BAS → TRE → BAL → FAD → LOUD whether the antenna is
→ EQ → BEBE → BAS mode, each mode fully extended or broken
by adjusting the volume knob to
select;
or not. Change it if
3 、 MP3 mode, press the rewind, short necessary;
press again to exit rewind; radio mode 2) Radio signal is too
is short by the frequency decreases weak;
until the next station; if not found 3) The antenna is
to return to the station; grounded improperly.
4, MP3 mode, press the fast forward,
short press again to exit the fast Confirm whether the
Poor reception antenna is grounded
forward; radio mode is short by the effect of radio
frequency of delivery until the next station improperly or not;
radio station; if not found the radio 4) There is a strong
station to return to the starting electromagnetic
station;
5、MODE MODE Select button interference sources,
6、BAND Band Select button such as high-power
7、Radio mode short press the tune out towers, large machine
station number 1, long press to store tools, large-scale
the first station; electrical equipment,
8、Radio mode, short press to bring up
the station number 2, long press to
substations and so on.
store the second station; MP3 mode, 5) Make sure that the
short press to select the previous receive frequency
folder; setting is correct.
9、Radio mode, short press to call out U-disk or 1) The file format is
station number 3, long press to store MMC card incorrect. Please copy
the third station; MP3 mode short music cannot MP3 format music
9-227
第九章 车身和附件

file;
2) The file system
is not correct, please
re-format the U disk
on the PC, and
choose to format
FAT12, FAT16 or
FAT32 format, and
then into the song
be played.
file;
3) There are too 1 Power supply 8 Panoramic
many other parking
unsupported files in 2 Main interface 9 Settings
3 Volume+ 10 Music
the memory, please
4 Volume- 11 Video
move them out; 5 Navigation 12 Image
4) Exceeds the 6 Radio 13 Mobile
range supported by Internet
the player. 7 Bluetooth 14 AUX-IN
Check the power supply
and check whether the Simple troubleshooting guidance
No power fuse is broken or not. 1) The antenna length is not
supply Change it with the fuse suitable. Check whether the
with same capacity if antenna is fully extended or
necessary. broken or not. Change it if
Poor necessary.
1) Press the power reception
button to reset the 2) Radio signal is too weak.
effect of 3) The antenna is grounded
machine; radio
2) Check the supply improperly. Confirm
station whether the antenna is
voltage and capacity to
meet the
grounded improperly or not.
Function requirements; 4) The radio is set to short
abnormalit range mode.
y 3) Check the
steering wheel key 1) The file format is incorrect.
without card key, Please copy MP3 format music
damage, if necessary, file.
U-disk or
unplug the steering 2) The file system is incorrect.
MMC Reformat the U-disk or MMC
wheel control line and card card on PC and select FAT16 or
then try。 music FAT32 format, and then save the
cannot be song file.
9.15.6.2 MP5 player (if any) played. 1) 3) There are too many
files other than MP3 format.
Please delete them.

Check the power supply and


No power check whether the fuse is broken
supply or not. Change it with the fuse
with same capacity if necessary.

9-228
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

1) Check whether the antenna


Unable is correctly connected or not.
reception of If any, connect it correctly.
radio 2) The radio is set to short-
range mode.

1) Confirm that the


navigation card has been
inserted.
No
2) Vehicle is not in the
navigatio
n outdoor or has not GPS
signal covering area.
3) Update it to the newest
map.
Touch
screen
key is Correct the touch screen
invalid or
incorrect.

9-229
第九章 车身和附件

locating device of the connector (CPA)


9.16 Wiring system and locating device of the terminal (TPA).

Frontal detection
9.16.1Diagnostic information Disconnect the connector and detect the
terminal for the fitting surface (front).
and steps Note: Don't insert the probe on the testing
equipment into any connector or fuse box terminal.
The probe diameter may cause most of terminals
9.16.1.1 How to find the circuit deformed. The deformed terminal may cause poor
The diagram of the electric system is contact and system fault. It is necessary to use
J35616-A connector to test the joint parts or
located in its corresponding chapters. All the J42675 flat-end lead to detect the joint parts and
chapters have many electric systems. Therefore, detect the terminal from the front. Don't use paper
each electric system diagram is further clip and other institute to avoid damage of the
classified into operation system. terminal and incorrect measurement.

Back detection
9.16.1.2 General electric diagnostic Don't disconnect the connector. Detect the
information terminal from the side (back) of the wire harness of
Necessary basic knowledge the connector.
If there is not basic electric knowledge, it is
very difficult use the diagnostic program in this Note:
chapter. It is necessary to understand the  Detect the connector terminal from the back
meanings of the basic electric theory, voltage only when the diagnostic program is specially
(V), current (A) and resistance (Ω). It is desired.
necessary to understand the conditions in case
the circuit is short circuit or broken. The  Don't detect the sealed connector (weather
customer shall be able to read or understand the pack), 280 or lower series metric combined
circuit diagram. connector, miniature combined connector or
flat wire (retracted or locked) from the
Circuit testing back。
“Circuit testing” chapter is used to  Detect the connector terminal that may be
introduce the following diagnostic information. damaged from the back. During operation, it
Using the information and the diagnostic
program, you can identify the trouble reason is necessary to pay special attention to avoid
that the electric function is failed. terminal deformation caused by that the
1. Test the joint with connector testing probe is inserted too deep or used
2. Test the electric connector testing probe size is too large。
3. Eliminate the trouble with digital universal
meter  After the connector is detected from the back,
4. Eliminate the trouble with testing lamp check whether the terminal is damaged. If the
5. Use jumper with fuse terminal is doubted, check whether the
6. Measure the voltage contact is correct or not。
7. Measure voltage drop
8. Test short circuit  Use a digital multimeter to troubleshoot
9. Detect whether the grounding is short circuit Note:
or not. The circuit containing any solid control
10. The voltage is short circuit or not. module such as power system control module
Test the joint with connecter can be only tested with the digital universal
Note: Don't insert the probe on the meter with 10MΩ or higher resistance such as
testing equipment into any connector or fuse
box terminal. The probe diameter may cause J39200 to test.。
most of terminals deformed. The deformed J39200 operation manual provides detailed
terminal may cause poor contact and system instructions. After receiving this digital universal
fault. It is necessary to use J35616-A meter, read it fully and bring it at any time for
connector to test the joint parts or J42675 flat- reference.
end lead to detect the joint parts and detect the When measuring the circuit voltage with high
terminal from the front. Don't use paper clip resistance, use digital universal meter instead of
and other institute to avoid damage of the testing lamp. The testing lamp can display voltage
terminal and incorrect measurement. but the digital universal meter can indicate the
voltage range.
Detection of electric connector The ohm on the digital universal meter indicates the
Note: When reconnecting the resistance value between the two points of the
connector or changing the circuit. The lower the resistance in the circuit, the
terminals, it is necessary to remount better the continuity of the circuit is.
9-230
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

。 Measure voltage on the selected point of one


Note: When measuring the resistance by circuit according to the following procedures:
using digital universal meter, firstly 1. Disconnect the electric connector on the tested
disconnect power supply of the doubted circuit if necessary.
circuit to avoid mistaken reading. When 2. Start all the tested circuits and/or system
according to the following procedures:
testing the resistance with digital 1) Turn on the ignition switch to keep engine going
universal meter, the used voltage is very out.
low so that it can only display the 2) Start the engine.
resistance readings.。 3) Use scanner to turn on the circuit and/or system in
Diode or some elements in the circuit may the “output control”.
cause false readings on the digital universal 4) Turn on switch of the tested circuit and /or
meter. If it is necessary to determine whether system.
the parts have effect on the measured result,
firstly obtain one reading and then exchange the 3. Select V (AC) or V (DC) on the digital universal
two leads to obtain the second reading. If the meter.
readings are different, it shows that the element 4. Connect the positive probe on the digital universal
affects the measured result. meter with the circuit point to be tested.
The following example shows the method 5. Connect the negative probe of the digital universal
that the digital universal meter is connected meter with the grounding wire stably.
with the circuit to be tested: 6. The digital universal meter will display voltage on
1. When detecting the both ends of the the tested point.
connector and operating the connector press the
lead or paste the lead on the wire harness with
tape during operation or road testing for Measuring voltage drop
continuous monitoring. See “How to detect the The following procedures can be used to measure the
electric connector”. potential difference between the two points.
2. Disconnect the wire harness on the both ends 1. Set the rotatable dial of the digital universal meter
of the doubted circuit connected with other wire to V (DC).
harness. 2. Connect negative probe of the digital universal
3. If the diagnosed system has specified meter with another end of the circuit to be tested.
outgoing wire or junction box, it is possible to 3. Operate the circuit.
use simplified digital universal meter to 4. The digital universal meter will display the
connect with the circuit or use it to detect the voltage difference between the two points.
multiple circuit quickly.
Using testing lamp for Measuring frequency
troubleshootingTesting lamp may simply and The following procedures are used to determine the
quickly test whether the circuit with low signal frequency:
resistance has voltage. J34142-B testing lamp is Note: Before pressing Hz button, connect the
compatible with the micro-pack consisting of digital universal meter with the circuit, which can
one 12V bulb and one pair of leads. automatically select the suitable location.
The tool shall be correctly used according to 1. Energize the circuit.
the following procedures: 2. Set the rotatable dial of the digital universal meter
1. One lead is grounded. to V (AC).
2. Another lead shall have different voltage 3. Connect positive probe of the digital universal
point along the circuit. meter with the circuit to be tested.
3. If the bulb is lit up, it shows the testing point 4. Connect positive probe of the digital universal
has voltage. 。 meter with the grounding wire stably.
5. Press Hz button on the digital universal meter.
Using jumper wire with fuse 6. The digital universal meter will display the
Note: The jumper wire with fuse may not measured frequency.
be able to avoid damage of solid
components.。 Testing short circuit
J36169-A jumper wire with fuse has a Test whether the circuit has good continuity
connector with small clip and can be used for according to the following procedures.
most of connectors, which may not cause any Using digital universal meter
damage. This jumper wire with fuse is provided 1. Set the rotatable dial of the digital universal meter
with 20A fuse and may not be suitable for some to resistance.
circuits. The used fuse shall not be more than 2. Disconnect the power supply circuit of doubted
the rated current on the tested circuit。 circuit (fuse and control module).
Measuring voltage 3. Disconnect load.
9-231
第九章 车身和附件

4. Press MIN MAX on the digital universal


meter.
5. Connect one probe of the digital universal
meter with the circuit to be tested.
6. Connect another end of the digital universal
meter with another end of the circuit to be
tested.
7. If the digital universal meter displays low
resistance or no resistance and the sound can be
heard, it shows that the circuit has good
continuity.

Using testing lamp


Note: Use the testing lamp procedures
only for the low resistance power supply and
grounding circuit.
1. Remove power supply on the doubted circuit
(i.e. fuse and control module).
2. Disconnect load.
3. Connect one probe of the testing lamp with
one end of the circuit to be tested.
4. Connect another probe of the testing lamp
with the positive terminal of the accumulator.
5. Connect another end of the circuit with the
grounding wire.
6. If the testing lamp is lit up (full lit up), then
the circuit has good continuity.

Test whether the grounding wire is short


circuit or not.
Test whether grounding of the circuit is short
circuit or not according to the following
procedures:
Using digital universal meter
1. Remove the power supply on the doubted
circuit (fuse and control module).
2. Disconnect the load.
3. Set the rotatable dial of the digital universal
meter to the resistance.
4. Connect one probe of the digital universal
meter with one of the circuit to be tested.

9-232
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

5. Connect another end of the digital universal welding, connected on the insulation sleeve instead
meter with grounding wire stably. of conductor, and the contacted part of the conductor
6. If the digital universal meter displays that the and terminal corroded etc.
resistance is not infinite resistance (OL), then 4. The insulation layer of the conductor is worn out
the circuit may meet with grounding short so that the exposed part is contacted with other wire
circuit fault. harness or part of the vehicle so as to cause short
circuit.
Using testing lamp 5. See “Conditions causing discontinuous fault” and
1. Disconnect the power supply on the doubted reproduce the conditions for inspection complaint.
circuit (i.e. fuse and control module). 6. See “Testing electrical discontinuity” to
2. Disconnect the load. understand the testing procedures to test the open
3. Connect one probe of the testing lamp with circuit, resistance too high, grounding short circuit
the positive pole of the accumulator. and voltage short circuit.
4. Connect one probe of the testing lamp with 7. See “Fast testing procedures for scanning tool” to
one end of the circuit to be tested. understand the advanced discontinuous diagnostic
5. If the testing lamp is lit up, then the circuit method,
meets with short circuit fault with the Test whether the terminal is connected correctly
grounding wire. or not.
Before changing the doubted parts, it is
Adding multiple loads on the fuse necessary to test terminal contact of the parts and
1. Look up the system diagram and determine any directly-connected connecter, and check the
fuse of the open circuit. fitting terminal to ensure good contact of the
2. Open the first connector or switch between terminal. If the contact between the female terminal
the fuse and each load. and male terminal of the connector is poor, it may be
3. Connect the digital universal meter with the caused by pollution or deformation.
fuse terminal (confirm the fuse is energized). Incorrect connection of the connector may
cause pollution. The connection miss or damage of
1) When the digital universal meter displays the the connector, damage of the connector or terminal
voltage, it shows that the wire harness exposed to humidity or dust may also cause
connected with the first connector or switch is pollution. The possible pollution in the connector the
short circuit. hood or body may cause that the terminal is corroded
2) If the digital universal meter does not display so as to cause open circuit or discontinuous open
voltage, see the next step. circuit.
3) Turn off the connector or switch until the If suitable probe is not used to test the fitting
digital universal meter displays voltage to find end of the connector, incorrect connection or
out the circuit with short circuit fault. frequently-disconnection of the connector may cause
deformation. Generally, the raised tongue
deformation of the female terminal may cause poor
Test whether the voltage is short circuit or contact of the terminal so as to form open circuit or
not. discontinuous open circuit.
Test the voltage of the circuit is short circuit or
not according to the following procedures:
1. Set the rotatable dial of the digital universal Round-head wire harness connector
meter to V (DC). Test the contact of the metric combination or 56
2. Connect positive probe of the digital series terminals according to the following
universal meter with one end of the circuit to be procedures. See J38125-B terminal repair tool kit or
tested. J38125-4 operation manual to identify the terminal.
3. Connect the negative pole of the digital Test contact of the terminals according to the
universal meter with stable grounding wire. following procedures.
4. Turn on the ignition switch and operate all 1. Disconnect the connector piece.
the accessories. 2. Check whether the connector is polluted or not
5. If the measured voltage is more than 1V, then visually. Pollution may cause white or green
the circuit meets with voltage short circuit. accumulated matters between the connecter housing
and terminals so as to cause too high contact
resistance, discontinuous contact or open circuit. If
Testing disconnecting and poor contact there is any pollution on the connector under the
Most of discontinuous faults are caused by hood or body, it is necessary to change the integrity
electric connection or wire harness. Check the including terminal, seal part and connector housing.
following items:
1. The conductor in the insulation sleeve is 3. Use the corresponding male terminal of J38125-B
broken. to test whether the retention force of the normal
2. The contact between female terminal and terminal is obviously different from one of the
male terminal of the connector is poor. For the doubted terminal or not。
specific procedures, see the following “tested Flat-wire (retracted and locked) connector
terminal is connected correctly or not”. There is not any part for repair of the flat-wire
3. The contact between the terminal and (retracted and locked) connectors on the wire
conductor is poor. Some conditions in this harness side or part side.
instructions includes poor connection, false The terminal contact shall be tested according to
9-233
第九章 车身和附件

the following procedures:


1. Disconnect the doubted part.
2. Check whether there is any pollution on the
both sides of the connector. Don't touch any
face of the connector to avoid pollution caused
by oil on skin.

9-234
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

3. Check whether bearing surface of the flat- electrical conductivity of water. After it is sprayed to
wire circuit terminal is cracked, broken or has the circuit, it is easy to cause circuit trouble. Spray
other defects causing poor contact of the
terminal visually. Check the connector on the the mixed solution to the doubted part. Operate the
part side visually to ensure that all the terminals wire harness according to the above methods when
are not damaged or deformed. monitoring the scanner or digital universal meter.
4. Insert the corresponding plug of J42675 flat-
wire probe assembly into the flat-wire wire
harness connector to test the doubted circuit. High temperature condition
If the complaint is related to heat, it is possible to use
Condition causing discontinuous fault J25070 blow lamp to simulate the condition. The
If the trouble is related to vibration, it is blow lamp can heat the doubted part or component.
necessary to operate the wire harness in order Operate the wire harness and monitor the scanner or
to reproduce the troubles concerned by the digital universal meter under high temperature
customer.
Circuit operation needs the following various condition to find out the trouble condition. The high
actions: temperature condition can also be obtained by
1. Swing the wire harness. testing on road under normal condition. If there is
2. Disconnect the connector and connect it not blow lamp, it is considered to enhance diagnosis
again.
3. Extrude the mechanical connection of the by this method. However, this method shall not be
connector. used for same control。
4. Move the wire harness or conductor to
identify whether the insulation layer is broken Low temperature condition
or not. According to the condition character, put a fan
5. Rearrange the wire harness or conductor. in the front of the vehicle and park the vehicle at
All the operations must be specific. For shade place to obtain ideal effect.
example, when connecting the scanner,
swinging the conductor may expose input If this method cannot be successful, it is possible to
trouble of the control module. In this case, it is use cooling processing such as ice or Ventury nozzle
suitable to use fast-testing option. See “Fast- (to provide heat air and cold air). This tool can
testing procedures of the scanner”. If you want produce the air flow with temperature lower than 0°F
to reproduce the trouble by operating the
suspension system or carriage, it is necessary to at one end and lower than 160°F at another end,
use weight, jack, jack bench and carriage etc. which is especially suitable for local cooling. After
this method is very useful to find out too short the vehicle and components or wire harnesses are
wire harness connector separation so as to sufficiently cooled, operate the wire harness or
cause poor contact condition. Set it to the
minimum/maximum peak (Peak Min/Max) components to reproduce the trouble.
mode and use the digital universal meter Testing electrical discontinuity
connected with the doubted circuit when testing Perform the following procedures and swinging
to obtain ideal result. See “Testing electric the wire harness laterally. Perform this test at
discontinuity”. convenient testing point (away from about 6 inches)
However, during operation of the circuit, and observe the testing equipment.
the good result can also been obtained by using 1. Test whether the grounding wire is short circuit or
vision, smell and hearing. not.
Single operation of the circuit cannot 2. Test whether the circuit is broken or not.
reproduce the trouble condition. In this case, it 3. Test whether the voltage is short circuit.
is necessary to supplement some additional If the trouble is not identified, use MIN MAX
conditions for the doubted circuit during function of J39200 digital universal meter to perform
operation of the circuit. These conditions the following procedures. This function can help you
include high humid condition and minimum or
maximum temperature condition. The methods with operation of the circuit without observing
to make the circuit produce these conditions are J39200. Upon testing the change, J39200 will give
as follows: 。 out the sound.。
Spraying salt water
Some compounds can conduct electricity Note: It is necessary to use J39200 to
when being dissolved in water, such as general
salt. Mix sufficient salt with water, which can perform the following procedures because
increase electrical conductivity. Therefore, any J39200 can be used to monitor current,
circuit sensitivity to humidity is easy to cause resistance or voltage and record the
trouble after unlimited spray of this mixed measured minimum and maximum
solution.
Mix 12 ounces of water with 1 soup spoon of values。
1. Connect J39200 to (keeping connecting
salt, adding 5% salt solution, and put this state) the both sides or connect one end of
solution into a general water-spraying bottle. the doubted circuit to another end. See “How
This mixed solution is enough to increase to eliminate trouble with digital universal
9-235
第九章 车身和附件

meter” to understand the method to


connect J39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotatable dial on J39200 to V
(AC) or V (DC).
3. Press selected location on J39200 to
select desired voltage.
4. When pressing MIN MAX button on
the digital universal meter, J39200 will
display 100ms record and give out sound
(buzz)。
Note: 100ms record mode is that the
input must stop on the new value to record the
integral change time length.
5. Swinging the connector or conductor for
testing or other operation to simulate the
possible condition to cause discontinuous
connection. See “Condition causing
discontinuous trouble”.

9-236
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

6. Hear new Min Max warning sound recorded. Circuit maintenance


7. Press MIN MAX button to display MAX “Circuit maintenance” is used to introduce the
value and record the value. following circuit maintenance information. At the
8. Press MIN MAX button again to display same time, the circuit trouble can be repaired faster
MIN and record the value. by using these elements.
9. Determine the difference between the 1. Circuit protection - fuse
maximum value and the minimum value. 2. Circuit protection – broker
1) If the difference between the recorded 3. Circuit protection – fusible connection
minimum voltage value and the maximum 4. Conductor insulation layer for repair of the circuit
voltage value is more than 1V or more, the 5. Connect the copper-cored conductor with
condition of discontinuous open circuit or connector clip
resistance too high may appear. Repair the 6. Connect the copper-cored conductor with
condition if necessary. connector sheath
2) If the difference between the maximum 7. Overlap the twisted/screened cable
value and minimum value is less than1V, the 8. Overlap the serial wire harness diode
condition of discontinuous open circuit or 9. Heat the oxygen sensor (HO2S) for repair of the
circuit
resistance too high may disappear.。 10. Repair the circuit of auxiliary inflatable
protective device (SIR)/auxiliary inflatable
Fast-testing procedures of the scanner protective system (SRS).
Fast-testing is used to record the 11. Flat-wire repair。
information that the vehicle control module
receives during fast-testing, and used to analyze Circuit protection – fuse
data when the vehicle condition appears so that
you can promote production of the condition
other than checking all the data and waiting for
appearance of the condition. The fast-testing
includes the relevant information of the contact
point that has been determined. Each fast-
testing can only record one single data sheet.
The scanner can save two fast-tests. The
capacity to record two fast-tests can be used to
compare the heat to cold and good to bad Fuse is the most common protective method for
conditions. The fast-testing can be saved in the vehicle circuit. As long as the current through the
sequence “first in and first out”. If three fast- circuit is sufficient, the fusible part would fuse and
tests are used, the first fast-testing in the form open circuit or broken circuit. Fuse is “one-
memory will be lost. time” protective device which needs to be changed
The fast-testing includes two types: upon overloading. If you need determining whether
1. Fast-testing – finished according to the the fuse is broken or not, remove the doubted fuse
selection in the fast-testing menu. and check whether the part in the fuse is open circuit
2. Rapid fast-testing – finished according to the (broken) or not. If it is not broken, use J39200 digital
selection in the data display soft key (not universal meter of broker tester to check the
including diagnostic trouble code information). continuity. If the element is broken or the continuity
During fast-testing, the information is is doubted, change it with one fuse with same rated
saved in the memory. The contained current.
information volume can reach 1200 frames. Type of Fuse
Because the fast-testing is recorded in the Rated current(A) Color
memory, the fast-testing would not be lost if the Automobile fuse, miniature fuse
power supply of scanner is turned off. 2 Gray
The fast-testing playback screen has the
graphic software which is valuable for 3 Purple
diagnosis of the discontinuous trouble. 5 Recst
The fast-testing graphic function can draw three 7.5 Brown
parameters for one time to help you determine 10 Red
whether the sensor exceeds the expected values 15 Blue
or not. The data will display the minimum 20 Yellow
value and maximum value of obtained frame in 25 White or natural color
the form of the graphic or digital form, which is 30 Green
very useful especially when the trouble only Maxi fuse
appears one time and the diagnostic trouble 20 Yellow
code is not set。 30 Bright green
40 Orange-yellow or bright
9-237
第九章 车身和附件

yellow conductor with connector clip” and repair it


50 Blue according to the guidance.。
60 Red
Conductor size
Conductor Corresponding
Circuit protection – broker section(mm²) current(A)
Broker is a protective device designed for 0.3 8
disconnection of the circuit when the current
0.5 11
load is more than the rated volume of the
broker. If the circuit is short circuit or reaches 0.85 14
other overload condition, the strong current will 1.25 19
cause short circuit of the broker terminal. The 2.0 28
broker includes the following two types. 3.0 38
Broker: It is disconnected when the current 5.0 51
through it is too large and lasts certain time. 9.0 73
The broker will be closed after several seconds. 10.0 100
If the larger current still exists, the broker will How to connect the copper-cored conductor with
be disconnected again. So long as the condition connector clip
with too high current is not eliminated, the Necessary tool: J38125-B terminal repair tool kit
broker will be broken and closed circularly. 1. Open the wire harness
PTC (positive temperature coefficient) 1) If the wire harness is wrapped with tape, remove
broker: Its resistance will increased quickly the tape.
when the current through is too high. The too 2) Peel out the wire harness with tailor knife to avoid
high current will heat the PTC device so as to damage of the conductor insulation.
increase the resistance. The resistance is 3) If the wire harness has black plastic conduit, pull
increased to finally disconnect the circuit out necessary conductor.
validly. It is different from the general broker. 2. Cutting conductor
So long as the circuit is not disconnected to 1) When cutting, exposed conductor end shall be
cancel the voltage on the terminal, the PTC small as much as possible.
device would not be reset. After the voltage is 2) Keep at least 40mm from each connector to other
canceled, the broker will be reset within 1 ~ 2 joint, branch and connector to avoid formation of
seconds. bridge between nearby connectors so as to cause
damage.
Circuit protection – fusible connection 3. Selecting the conductor with correct size and type
Fusible connection is a conductor designed 1) The conductor must have same or larger
for fusion and disconnection of the circuit when specifications as the original conductor.(Besides the
the current is too high. Generally, the fusible fused connection), choose QVR or AVSS.
connection is located between or near the 2) The rated temperature of the conductor insulation
accumulator and starter or electric center. On
must be same or higher – the part that is not affected
the both ends of the fusible conductor, it is
possible to determine whether it is disconnected by high temperature shall be provided with general
or not by using broker tester or J39200 digital insulation and the part with higher temperature shall
universal meter. If it is disconnected, it is be provided with crosslinked polystyrene
changed with the fusible connection with same conductor.。
specification. Important precautions: It is possible to
Repair of the fusible connection use crosslinked polystyrene to replace
Important precautions: the fusible polyvinyl chloride but polyvinyl chloride
connection with length more than cannot be used to replace crosslinked
225mm cannot provide sufficient polystyrene. Crosslinked polystyrene
overload protection. See “How to
cannot withstand oil and shall not be
connect the copper-cored conductor
with connector clip”. used to replace the conductor that may
contact oil。
How to repair damaged conductor insulation 4 Remove the insulation layer.
layer 4. Peeling out the insulation layer
If the conductor is not damaged, determine the 1) Select suitable hole size of cable clamp or try to
trouble location and wrap it with tape. If the assemble it from large to small.
2) Peel out about 7.5mm insulation layer on the
damaged area is large, change the section with conductor that needs to be connected.
trouble. See “How to connect the copper-cored 5. Select suitable fixing connector of cable clamp.
9-238
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Determine the tool and joint with suitable cable


clamp size according to the instruction of
J38125-B terminal repair tool kit.
6. Connect the two peeled wire joints and
clamp it with thumb and index figure.

7. Align the connector clip (2) with the middle


part of the peeled conductor (1) and fix the clip 10. Clamp the connector on the both ends (2)
to the place.
1) Keep the wire end extended from the both
ends of the clip.
2) Keep the clip not on the insulation layer.。

11
. Fill the hole behind 60/40 rosin-cored welding rod
and use it according to the instruction provided by
the manufacturer

8. Put the clamp between the connector clip and


the conductor.
9. Clamp it continuously to close the clamp tool
to ensure that there is not any strand is cut 12. Wrap the joint with tape to keep same tape
off.。 thickness as the insulation layer on the existing
conductor

13. If the conductor is not covered by conduct or


another wire harness, wrap it with tape again. Wrap
the first tape with winding method.
9-239
第九章 车身和附件

14. Connect the copper-cored conductor with


joint sheath. Except for ethylene –
tetrafluoroethylene and coaxial cable, crimped
and sealed joint sheathes are suitable for all
insulations to form one-to-one joint. The
ethylene – tetrafluoroethylene and coaxial cable
is applicable for the part with specific special
requirements such as moisture-proof seal. Use
crimped and sealed joint sheathes to connect
the copper-cored conductor according to the
following instructions
List of crimping or sealing joints
Crimping Lead
Joint
tool specifications
sheath
groove American wire
color
color gauge/(metric)
Orange- 20,18/
Red
red (0.5,0.8)
16,14/
Blue Blue
(1.0,2.0)
12,10/
Yellow Yellow
(3.0,5.0)
Necessary tool: J38125-B repair tool kit
1. Open the wire harness.
1) If the wire harness is wrapped with tape,
remove the type.
2) Peel out the wire harness with tailor knife
to avoid damage of the conductor insulation.

9-240
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

3) If the wire harness has black plastic sheath on one shoulder of the sleeve to avoid too
conduit, pull out necessary conductor. long extended section of the joint (3).
2. Cutting conductor 10. Clamp handle of J38125 tightly so that the
1) When cutting, exposed conductor end shall crimper can be opened when the handle is released.
be small as much as possible. The crimper handle cannot be opened until the
2) Keep at least 40mm from each connector to pressure applied on the joint sheath is suitable.
11. Shrink the insulator around the joint.
other joint, branch and connector to avoid 1) Heat the curved part of the sleeve with blow lamp.
formation of bridge between nearby connectors 2) Move the blow lamp gradually to the opening of
so as to cause damage。 the sleeve.
- When reaching the sufficient shrinking degree,
there may be little amount of sealant flowing from
the end of the sleeve.
- Repair the conductor joint of auxiliary inflatable
protective device (SIR)/auxiliary inflatable
protective system (SRS)。

Overlapping twisted/screened cable


Twisted/screened cable is used to avoid effect
due to electric noise. This double-layered cable is
used to connect the radio and Delco-Bose
loudspeaker/amplifier device with other electric
appliances that need to transmit low level and high
sensitive signal. Repair the twisted/screened cable
according to the following instructions.

3. Select the conductor with correct size and


type
1) The conductor size must be less than the
original size.
2) The rated temperature (4) of the conductor
insulation must be same or higher.
- The part that is not affected by high 1. Remove the sheath (1). Operate it carefully to
temperature shall be provided with general avoid damage of the conductor with Polyester tape.
insulation.
- The part with higher temperature shall be 2. Unwind the tape and don't remove the tape, and
provided with crosslinked polystyrene insulated then wrap the twisted conductor with tape again。
conductor。
Important precautions: It is possible to use
crosslinked polystyrene to replace polyvinyl
chloride but polyvinyl chloride cannot be used
to replace crosslinked polystyrene. 3. Repair the joint and loosen the connector and
Crosslinked polystyrene cannot withstand oil operate it according to the overlapping instruction of
and shall not be used to replace the wire that the copper-cored conductor. We recommend
may contact with oil overlapping by 65mm。
4. Peel out the insulation layer.
1) Select the suitable hole size of cable clamp
or try to assemble it from large to small.
2 ) Peel out about 7.5mm insulation layer on
the conductor (1) that needs to be connected.
5. Select suitable joint sheath (2) and necessary 4. Reassemble the cable.
crimping tool. See “List of crimped and sealed 1) Wrap the conductor with polyester tape again.
joints”. 2) Operate it carefully to prevent the discharge
6. Put the formed tool into J38125 crimping wire is wrapped in the tape (1).
tool. 3) Connect the copper-cored conductor with the
7. Put the joint sheath into the groove of the discharge wire according to the connecting
crimping tool and press it at point 1 of the joint instructions.
tightly. 4) Wrap the discharge wire around the conductor
8. Clamp the crimper handle slightly to fix the with polyester tape.
joint sheath in groove of the crimping tool
firmly. Important precautions: Wrap it with
9. Insert the conductor into the joint sheath and polyester tape and keep the aluminum
lean it on the sleeve shoulder. Keep the joint end inward to ensure good contact with

9-241
第九章 车身和附件

the discharge wire。 How to repair heating oxygen sensor


(HO2S) circuit
Note: Don't repair by welding under any
condition to avoid blocking air
benchmark。
5. Wrap the integral cable with tape by winding If the heating oxygen sensor wire,
connector or terminal is damaged, it is
method。 necessary to change the integral oxygen
sensor assembly. Don't repair the wire,
connector or terminal. It is necessary have
Overlapping serial wire harness diode clean air benchmark to ensure normal
Many electric systems of the vehicles are function of the sensor. The clean air
provided with diode to separate the circuit and benchmark is obtained through oxygen
protect the parts from damage of peak voltage. sensor signal and heater wire. If the wire,
Assemble new diode according to the following connector or terminal is repaired, it may
procedures: block the air benchmark so as to cause
1. Open the wire harness. performance deterioration of the oxygen
1) If the wire harness is wrapped with tape, sensor.
remove the tape. Repairing the heating oxygen sensor, the
2) Peel out the wire harness with tailor knife to following principles must be followed:
avoid damage of the conductor insulation. 1. Don't apply contact detergent or other
3) If the wire harness has black plastic conduit, material on the wire harness connector of
pull out the diode. the sensor or vehicle. This material may
2. If the diode is bonded on the wire harness, enter the sensor to cause performance
remove all the tapes. deterioration. In addition, don't damage
3. Check and record the current direction and the sensor wire and wire harness to
diode direction. expose the wire, or otherwise, foreign
matter may enter the sensor to deteriorate
4. Use suitable welding tool to remove all the the performance.
diodes that are failed and cannot operate from 2. Don't directly bend or twist the sensor
the wire harness。 or vehicle wires to avoid blocking
Important precautions: If the diode benchmark air passageway through wire.
3. Don’t disassemble or remove the
is close to the connector terminal, oxygen sensor grounding wire
remove the terminal from the (corresponding location). The vehicle
connector to avoid damage caused with grounding wire sensor uses the
by welding tool。
grounding wire as only grounding contact
of the sensor. Disassembly of the
5. The original welded section close to grounding wire may cause deterioration
the conductor shall be peeled out a of the engine performance.
section of insulation layer carefully. The
peeled size shall depend on the new 4. The vehicle wire harness connector
diode. must be sealed completely to avoid
6. Check current direction of the new
diode to ensure that the mounting damage caused by entering water。
deviation of the diode is in line with the How to repair the circuit of auxiliary inflatable
requirement. See the corresponding protective device (SIR)/auxiliary inflatable
maintenance manual to understand protective system (SRS)
correct mounting location of the diode. The circuit of auxiliary inflatable protective device
7. Connect the new diode with 60/40 (SIR)/auxiliary inflatable protective system (SRS)
rosin-cored welding rod. Before needs special circuit repair procedures due to its
welding, connect the radiator (aluminum
spring clip) with the end of the diode sensitivity. The twisted and wire parts (such as
conductor to avoid too hot according to connector and terminal) of the circuit of auxiliary
the guidance provided by the welding inflatable protective device (SIR)/auxiliary inflatable
equipment manufacturer.
8. If the terminal has been removed, protective system (SRS) must be repaired according
reassemble the terminal into the to the special procedures and guidance。
connecting housing. Unless otherwise specified on the
9. Bond the diode on the wire harness or terminal package, don't change the
connector with electrical tape。 damaged auxiliary inflatable protective
device (SIR)/auxiliary inflatable
Important precautions: Wrap all the protective system (SRS) circuit with the
exposed conductors and diode terminal in the assembly。
connecting points with tape to avoid Necessary tool: J38125-B terminal repair
tool kit
grounding short circuit or soaking。 The tool kit J38125-B includes the

9-242
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

following parts:
1. Special seal joint – for repair of the
circuit of auxiliary inflatable
protective device (SIR)/auxiliary
inflatable protective system (SRS)
conductor.
2. Wire peeling tool
3. Special crimping tool
4. Blow lamp
5. Operation manual
The seal joint has two important
features:
1. Special radiator sheath can provide
seal environment for the joint. The
radiator sheath has sealant in it.
2. The cross (knurl) cored crimping
provides necessary contact for the
sensitive power circuit.
J38125-B can be used as general
terminal repair tool kit. The tool kit
includes the following parts:
1. Large amount of general electric
terminals
2. Suitable tool to connect the
terminal with the wire
3. Suitable tool to remove the
terminal from the connector
How to repair the circuit of auxiliary
inflatable protective device
(SIR)/auxiliary inflatable protective
system (SRS) connector (plastic
housing and terminal metal pin)
Use the assembly for repair of the
connector to repair the damaged wire
harness and terminals of the circuit of
auxiliary inflatable protective device
(SIR)/auxiliary inflatable protective
system (SRS). Don't repair the
outgoing line with the connector
assembly. The assembly includes the
operation manual and seal joint. Use
the seal joint to overlap the new wire,
connector and terminal on the wire
harness. The joint crimping tool is
provided with color key to facilitate
the joint matching in J38125-B. It is
necessary to use the joint crimping
tool for the joints.

9-243
第九章 车身和附件

The terminal of the circuit of connect a new wire with same specifications
auxiliary inflatable protective device (0.5mm, 0.8mm and 1.0mm etc). Use seal joint or
(SIR)/auxiliary inflatable protective crimping tool in J38125-B. Repair it according to
system (SRS) is made of special the following repair procedures to ensure integrity
metal. The metal can provide of the seal joint.
necessary contact for the sensitive  2. It is necessary to perform the following
low power circuit. Only the connector procedures according to the sequence. If the
repair assembly has these terminals. strand is damaged, repeat the procedures.
Don't use other terminals to replace
the assembly terminals. The integral wire must be peeled off and keep
If the single terminal of the sensor its integrity。
and diagnostic module (SDM) wire Crimping Wire specification
harness connector is damaged, use Joint sheath tool groove mm2/(USA
one of the following two components color color specification)
to change the sensor and diagnostic
module wire harness connector: Orange red
1. Outgoing line assembly of the (yellow – Red(1) 0.35-0.8/(18-20)
sensor and diagnostic module pink)
2. Assembly for change of the sensor Blue Blue (2) 1.0-2.0/(14-16)
and diagnostic module connector
If other single terminal at the Yellow
Yellow 3.0-5.0/(10-12)
connecting part of the circuit of (3)
auxiliary inflatable protective device 1. Remove the tape and open the wire harness.
(SIR)/auxiliary inflatable protective 1) Cut off the wire harness with tailor knife
system is damaged, use suitable (available from Sewing Supplies store to avoid dame
connector to repair the integral joint. of the wire insulation layer.
If necessary, change the integral the 2) Except for ethylene-tetrafluoroethylene
circuit of auxiliary inflatable copolymer and coaxial cable, crimped and sealed
protective device (SIR)/auxiliary joint sheath can be used for all types of insulation.
inflatable protective system to keep 3) The joint with two or more wires shall not be
the circuit integrity of the circuit of provided with crimped or sealed joint sheath.
auxiliary inflatable protective device 2. When cutting, exposed wire shall be small as
(SIR)/auxiliary inflatable protective much as possible. The wire shall be longer to
system. facilitate change of the joint location.
Adjust the joint location to keep at least 40mm
。 distance from other joint, branch or connector.
How to repair outgoing wire of the circuit of 3. Peel off the insulation layer:
auxiliary inflatable protective device 1) If the existing wire needs to be added with a
(SIR)/auxiliary inflatable protective system section, use the wire with same size as the original.
(SRS) Find out correct wire size according to one of the
Important precautions: Don't repair following methods:
on the outgoing wire, connector or 1. Find out wire and convert it as metric on the
terminal. The outgoing wire is diagram.
directly connected with the device 2. Use UAS wire gauge specification.
(not through the connector). If the 3. If the wire cannot be determined, peel off the
outgoing line is damaged, it is insulation layer from the maximum opening of the
necessary to change the integral pinchers.
component (including outgoing 1) Peel off about 7.5mm on each terminal to connect
wire). Inflatable protective device the wire.
steering wheel module coil is the 2) Don't flatten or cut the strand. Check whether the
example with outgoing wire peeled wire is flattened or cut or not.
component.。 3) If the wire is damaged, cut the damaged section
How to repair the circuit of auxiliary and repeat the procedure.
inflatable protective device (SIR)/auxiliary 4. Select suitable seal joint sheath according to the
inflatable protective system (SRS) system wire size. See the above table and start the repair
Necessary tool: J38125-B terminal repair tool procedures. Determine the color code of the joint
kit
Important precautions: sheath and crimping tool groov。
1. See “wire repair” in the “Wire
system” to determine correct size for repair of
the circuit wire. It is necessary to master this
information to ensure the circuit integrity. If
the wire is not damaged, it is possible to

9-244
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

inflatable protective system (SRS):


If any original joint (3 or more wires) in the (SRS)
wire harness circuit of auxiliary inflatable protective
device (SIR)/auxiliary inflatable protective system
(SRS) is damaged, use the new joint (not sealed) of
J38125-B. Use the joint correctly according to the
operation manual of the assembly。
Fixing device of the connector location (CPA)
The connector location fixing device (CPA) is a
small plastic block that is mounted on the electric
connectors of the circuit of auxiliary inflatable
protective device (SIR)/auxiliary inflatable
protective system (SRS) through raised tongue. The
connector location fixing device can avoid loosing of
5. Use the joint crimping tool of J38125-B and the connecting plate due to vibration. The connector
put the joint sheath in the joint crimping tool location fixing device must be mounted to the place
to ensure good contact of fitting terminals of the
groove with suitable color。 circuit of auxiliary inflatable protective device
(SIR)/auxiliary inflatable protective system (SRS).
Terminal location fixing device (TPA)
The terminal location fixing device (TPA) block
likes a plastic comb used in the control module
connector. The terminal location fixing device can
firmly locate the terminal in the connector housing.
Unless the terminal needs to be changed, don't
remove the terminal location fixing device from the
connector housing。

6. Put the joint sheath into the groove to ensure How to repair the flat wire
Note: The flat wire located in the flexible wire
the crimping is located between end of the harness cannot be repaired. The integral wire harness
sleeve and the shoulder. There is a shoulder (3) must be changed if the flexible wire harness is open
in the sheath sleeve (2) to avoid axial circuit or broken.
movement of the wire (1). Press the crimper How to repair the connector
handle slightly to fix the joint sheath in the “How to repair the connector” is used to introduce
groove。 the repair information of the following connectors.
These elements can be used to quickly repair
connector trouble.
1. Locking plate of the connector location fixing
device
2. Locking plate of the terminal location fixing
7. Insert the wire into the joint sheath and lean device
against the sleeve shoulder. 3. Push-in connector
8. Clamp the crimping tool handle tightly to 4. Pull-out connector
ensure that it can be opened when the crimper 5. Weather pack connector
handle is loosened until the pressure applied on 6. Repair connector terminal
the joint sheath is suitable. For another end of
the joint, repeat the step 4 and 5.
9. Heat the curved part of the sleeve with blow Locking plate of the connector location fixing
lamp. device
10. Move the blow lamp gradually to the The connector location fixing device (CPA) is a
opening of the sleeve. small plastic block mounted on the electric
1) With movement of the heat along the connector of the attached additional inflatable
insulation layer, the sleeve will be retracted protective device system through raised tongue. The
completely. connector location fixing device is used to avoid
loosing of the connector plate due to vibration, and
2) When reaching the sufficient retracting ensure good contact of the fitting terminals of the
degree, there will be small amount of sealant additional inflatable protective device.
flowing from the end of the sleeve。
How to repair the circuit of auxiliary Locking plate of the terminal location fixing
inflatable protective device (SIR)/auxiliary device
The terminal location fixing device (TPA) block
9-245
第九章 车身和附件

likes a plastic comb used in the control module possible.


connector. The terminal location fixing device 3. Move new cable seal part to the wire.
can firmly locate the terminal in the connector 4. Peel out 5mm insulation layer on the wire.
housing. Unless the terminal needs to be
changed, don't remove the terminal location 5. Press the new terminal on the wire tightly.
fixing device from the connector housing. 6. Weld it with rosin-cored welding rod.
7. Slide the cable seal part to the terminal.
Push-in connector 8. Crimp the cable seal part and insulator.
How to remove the terminal 9. If the connector is located outside the passenger
Repair the push-in connector according to the compartment, apply lubrication grease on the
following instructions。 connector。
How to reassemble the terminal
10. For reassembly of the new terminal or wire
assembly, see “How to repair the circuit”.
11. The cable seal part must be kept on the joint
terminal side.
12. Insert the wire from the rear and clamp it firmly.
1. Disassemble the terminal location fixing 13. Assemble the terminal location fixing device and
device (TPA), connector location fixing device connector location fixing device and/or auxiliary
(CPA)/or auxiliary locking plate
locking plate。
2. Disassemble the connector plate (1)。
Pull-out connector
How to disassemble the terminal
Repair the pull-out connector according to the
operation manual。

3. Loosen the terminal with suitable tweezers or


disassembly tool (1).
4. Pull out the cable and terminal (2) from the
rear end of the terminal carefully. 1. Disassemble the terminal location fixing device
。 (TPA), connector location fixing device (CPA)
and/or auxiliary locking plate.
2. Disassemble the connector locking plate.
3. Insert the suitable tweezers or disassembly tool (4)
into the front end of the connector housing.
4. Clamp the wire from the rear end of the connector
housing and pull the terminal (1) from the connector
housing (3) carefully.
5. Check whether the terminal is damaged or not. If
it is damaged, see “How to repair the terminal”.
5. If the terminal (1) is used again, resume 6. If the terminal is used again, resume shape of the
shape of the locking device. locking raised tongue (2)。
6. When repairing the terminal, see “How to
repair the terminal”.。 How to repair the terminal
1. Move down the cable seal part from the terminal.
2. Cut the wire close to the terminal as much as
How to repair the terminal possible.
1. Move down the cable seal part from the 3. Slide the new cable seal part to the wire.
terminal. 4. Peel out 5mm insulation layer on the wire.
2. Cut the wire close to the terminal as much as 5. Clamp the new terminal on the wire firmly.
9-246
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

6. Weld the rosin-cored welding rod. 4 4. Insert the disassembly tool of the weather pack
7. Slide the cable seal part to the terminal. terminal into the front end of the connector hole
8. Crimp the cable seal part and insulator. (fitting end) to lean it against the raised shoulder (1).
9. If the connector is located outside the 5. Pull the wire from the rear end of the connector
passenger compartment, apply lubrication (2) to remove the terminal.。
grease on the connector。
How to assemble the terminal
1. Check whether the terminal is damaged or Important precaution: Don't use too much
not. If it is damaged, see “How to repair the force to disassemble the terminal from the
terminal”. connector.。
2. If the terminal is used again, resume the 1. Check whether the terminal and connector
shape of the locking raised tongue (2). are damaged or not. Repair it if necessary. See
3. The cable seal part must be kept on the joint repair of the connector.
terminal side. 2. Resume the shape of the locking raised
4. Insert the terminal into the connector housing tongue (2) and keep the terminal in the
to lock the terminal locating raised tongue in connector housing.
the housing. 3. Close the auxiliary locking plate and
5. Assemble the terminal location fixing device, connect the connector plate.
connector location locking device and/or 4. Check whether the circuit is turned on and
auxiliary locking plate.。 the operation is satisfactory or not.
5. Check the system。
Weather Pack connector How to repair the connector terminal
Repair the weather pack connector correctly Repair the following parts according to the following
according to the following procedures: repair procedures::
。 1. Push-in terminal
2. Pull-out terminal
3. Weather pack terminal
Some of the terminals need not perform all the steps.
Ignore unnecessary steps to quicken repair progress.
J38125-B terminal repair tool also includes other
information。
1. Disassemble the connector plate (1).
1. Cut the terminal between the core and insulation
2. Open the auxiliary locking plate, which is
crimping to minimize loss of the wire length.
helpful to keep tension of the terminal.
2. Use correct seal according to the wire size. For the
Generally, it is molded into the connector (1).
weather pack terminal, slide the seal along the wire
3. Clamp the conductor and push the terminal
backward to remove the insulation.
into the most front location to keep the wire at
3. Remove the insulation.
the location。 4. For the weather pack terminal, align the seal with
the cable insulated end.
5. Put the seal strip into the terminal. For the weather
pack terminal, put the strip and seal into the
terminal.
6. Twist the core wing by hand。
7 . Twist the insulation wing by hand. For the
weather pack terminal, twist the insulation wing and
wind it on the seal and cable by hand.
8. Weld all the terminals twisted by hand。

9.16.2Diagram and wiring diagram


9.16.2.1Description and operation
9-247
第九章 车身和附件

How to read the circuit diagram

Front Fuse Box


Reverse Lamp

Reverse Lamp Switch

RH RR Reverse Lamp

LH RR Reverse Lamp

Remarks to Circuit Diagram


Power supply line;
A
Power supply type: BAT,ACC,ON,STAR
Fuse box;
B
Type: forecabin fuse box, indoor fuse box。
C Wire color。
D Compartment content circuit (switch)
Grounding wire, grounding wire location: Self-grounding
E
If the grounding wire is not described, it falls within self-grounding.

9.16.2.2 General information

The relative position distribution between the wire harness and harness
RH RR Door Harness

9-248
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

RH FR Door Harness

Engine Hood Harness


Chassis Harness
FR Cabin Harness Cabin
Tail Door Harness
No.2
Engine Harness

Roof Harness
Tail Door Harness
No.1

Engine Hood LH FR Door Harness LH RR Door Harness

Diagram of the wire harness connection

9.16.2.3 Diagram and distribution diagram

9-249
第九章 车身和附件

EPS Insurance

Cab electrical box power


supply
Main relay
Front and rear oxygen sensor
Power supply for cabin electrical box

High and low speed fan relay coil

ECU part

generator generator
ST Relays

Ignition coils 4pcs


Transmission chain relay

ECU Module
Battery 12V Injectors 4pcs
Starter

Fuel relay coil

Air conditioning relay coil

Carbon canister solenoid valve

Intake valve VVT

exhaustvalve VVT

Discharge control valve

Exhaust gas control valve

Brake light switch

To be continued

9-250
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Loudspeaker relay

Electric horn buzzer

High - light relay

High beam lights

Low - light relay


Rear brake lights relay
Low beam lights

Rear brake lights


Front fog lamp relay
Brake light switch
Front fog lamps

Daytime running
lights
Front blower relay
compressor

Front blower

Compressor Relays

Sunshine rainfall sensor / Driving recorder B+

PEPS Controller

High-speed fan
A key to start the switch

Low speed fan meter

Diagnosis of mouth

Front and rear indoor light / Welcome light / Makeup lights 40W

Luggage lights

To be continued

9-251
第九章 车身和附件

Turning lights

Fuel pump relay

Fuel pump

Skylights

Rear wiper exterior mirrors folding motor

Front wiper

Door locks

Rear defrost relay

Rear defrost heated mirrors

Rear fog lamp relay

Rear fog lamp

Front air conditioning controller

Window anti-folder 1-1

Window anti-folder 1-2

Window anti-folder 2-1

ESCL Relays
Electron - steering column

IG2 Relays
After the blower

Front blower relay coil

Signal line

ACCRelays

Car power supply M 120W

Car power supply R 120W

Cigarette lighter

rearview mirror

Signals
Window anti-clamp signal lights

Driving recorder signal line

antenna

To be continued

9-252
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Skylights
IG1 Relays

meter

Front air conditioning


controller
Rear air conditioning
controller
AVM controller
Combination Switch

Window anti-clip ECU signal line

Signal line

airbag

Signal line

Signal line

Reversing lights

Dimming motor

Yaw angle sensor

Steering wheel angle sensor

ST Relays Transmission chain relay

9-253
第九章 车身和附件
Forehold front column (LH)
Engine block
Front section of stringer inner plate (LH)
The longitudinal section of the longitudinal section (RH)
Front wheel cover front section (LH)
Front wheel cover front section (RH)
Front wheel cover front section (LH)
The longitudinal section of the longitudinal section (RH)

Battery tray mounting bracket

Front side inner panel (RH)


Front side inner panel (LH)

Front side inner panel (RH)


Front side inner panel (LH)

Steering support member assembly

Middle channel reinforcement

EPB Actuator Bracket

Front section of the rear floor

Rear middle of inner plate (LH)

Rear middle of inner plate (LH)


Rear middle of inner plate (RH)

Backdoor Inner Skinning Point

Backdoor Inner Skinning Point

9-254
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories
Ground Point 1 Ground Point 3
Ground Point 2

Radiator fan Left front position light black

Negative battery black


Left front turn signal black
black
Gearbox black
Left front fog lamps

black
Left headlights dimming lights

Brake Level Switch


black

Clutch low switch


black
Steering wheel angle sensor
black
black
Clutch high switch

Ultrasonic sensors (FL) black


Forehold front column (LH) Front section of stringer inner plate (LH)

Front wheel cover front section (LH)

Ground Point 4 Ground Point 5 Ground Point 6

black Engine ECU


Front wiper motor
black

Front blower relay black


Junctio black
n
Electric horn black

Low beam / High beam


black

black

Battery tray mounting bracket


Front side inner panel (LH)

Front wheel cover front section(LH)

9-255
第九章 车身和附件

Ground Point 4 Ground Point 9


Ground Point 8
(chassis)
Oil pump grounding point
Left front door light switch black

Left rear door light switch black

black
Drive seat belt switch black
black

Electric window main switch black

black
Electric window main switch (LH REAR DOOR)

Left front door request switch black

Left rear-view mirror heating black

black
Left turn signal Rear floor front section
EPB Actuator Bracket
Mechanical control unlock / lock switch black

Front side inner panel (LH)

Ground Point 10 Ground Point 12 Ground Point 13

black black
Back door micro switch Rear Wiper Motor
High brake lights black

rear defrost black Back door lock motor black


Back door right position lights
Back door right turn signal black
Back door right brake light Back door gated switch blac
Back door right reversing lights k

Back door left position lights


Back door left turn signal black
Back door left brake light
Back door left reversing lights

Internal wiring harness


License Plate Light black

Backdoor Inner Skinning Point B


Backdoor Inner Skinning Point A
Rear middle of inner plate (LH)

9-256
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Ground Point 11 Ground Point 14


Ground Point 15

black black Right front door light switch black


Rear Blowers Panoramic parking controller

Right rear door light switch black


Rear position lights
Rear turning lights
black
Rear fog lights Drive seat belt switch black
Rear brake lights

SBR sensor black

Ultrasonic sensors rear


black Electric window main switch FR RH DOOR black

Electric window main switch REAR RH DOOR black


Car power supply R black
black
Rearview mirror heating

black
Right turn signal
Rear middle of inner plate (LH)
Rear middle of inner plate (RH)

Right front door request switch FR black

Front side inner panel (RH) B

Ground Point 16 Ground Point 17 Ground Point 18 Ground Point 19

Front blower
Right front position light black

Right front turn signal black

Right front fog lamp black


black

Right headlight dimming motor black

black
Tri - state pressure switch
black

black Front washing motor black

black
Rear washing motor Front section of stringer inner plate (RH)
Front section of stringer inner plate
(RH)
Steering support member assembly
Ultrasonic sensors FR black

Front wheel cover front section (RH)

Drivi
ng recordervWindow anti-clip controller

9-257
第九章 车身和附件

Ground Point 22
Ground Point 20
Ground Point 21

Electric sunroof black Driving recorder


Combination instrument black black

Electric rearview mirror adjustment switch Rain light sensor


black
Combination Switch black
black
Diagnostic interface
EPS SWITCH black
Window anti-clip controller black

Front reading light black


black

Rear indoor lights black


black

Makeup mirror lights black


A key to start the switch
black

Cruise control
Multi-function push button black
switch
Multi-function button small
Steering support member assembly lights

Steering support member assembly


Steering support member assembly

Ground Point 23
Ground Point 24

Cigarette lighter black black

Car power supply black Window anti-clip controller two lines black

black
Left and right seat heating switch black

black
Rear air conditioning controller assembly black
Danger alarm switch black

black
Front air conditioning controller assembly
Headlight adjustment switch black

Junction black Yaw angle sensor black

Steering support member assembly Front side inner panel (RH) A

9-258
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories
Ground Point 27
Ground Point 25

Ignition coils black


airbag

Knock sensor shielding black

black
Engine speed sensor

black Neutral position sensor black

Middle channel reinforcement A Engine block

9.16.3 Fuse box


Forecabin fuse box

9-259
第九章 车身和附件

Fan relay Paddles device Transmission chain relay

starter
Fan low speed

Starter chain relay

Compressor Relays

Fan low speed

Spare 15A
Spare 20A

High beam relay

Loudspeaker relay
Spare 15A
Spare 10A

Low beam relay

Low beam
Fan relay

main relay

Front fog lamp relay

Front fog lamp daytime running lights

compressor Speaker buzzer

High beam
Fan relay speed control
main relay

ECUModule

Reversing lights ECU part Oxygen Sensor

Dimming motor

Instrument fuse box

9-260
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Spare insurance film


Paddles device

PEPS A key to start the


BCM instrumentation
controller switch
Front and rear air
ACC Relays conditioning
Sunshine rainfall sensor traffic
recorder controller
Window anti-folder
AVM controller
Diagnostic + instruments + Combination Switch
Reserved MP5 Skylights

Rear brake light switch


airbag

Interior lights/Welcome light/Makeup lights/Luggage lights


Rear blower
IG1 Relays

Turning lights

Fuel pump

Brake Lamp
Relay
Skylights

Oil pump
Rear wiper / rearview relay
mirror fold

Front wiper
Rear defrost relay

Front blower
Door locks

Rear defrost
IG2 relay
IG2 Front blower constant power  CVT
controller, Electric seat
Rear fog lights shift lock,
transmission
chain
Car power
Front air conditioning controller main supply M
power window switch combination switch
IG1/ACC Front blower constant Car power
power  supply R
Window anti-folder 1-1

Cigarette
lighter
Window anti-folder 1-2

rearview mirror
Window anti-folder
Window anti-folder 2-1 Driving recorder
BCM

MP5
antenna

Reversing
lamp relay Shift lock Rear fog
ESCL relay
relay lamp relay

9-261
第九章 车身和附件

9.17Data link communication


9.17.1Diagram and wiring diagram
9.17.1.1
chassis Wiring diagram of data link joint circuit
Car body

Come from
air bag ACU
22 FOOT

9-262
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.17.1.2 Diagram of connection terminals of the data link

Pin Line color Features

no
no
no no

Green white Body CAN-H


can
black Body CAN-H
can
black signal
can
Green red
Chassi can-h
can
Green black Air bag K line

no no

no no

no no

Green black Body CAN-L


can
no no

no no

Green yellow Body CAN-L


can
Green yellow LIN
can
Red brown power supply can

9.17.2 Location diagram of the components


9.17.2.1 Data link communication components

Description Location Location diagram


The cab is near the See “Diagram of data link
Data link connector (DLC)
fuse box connectors” on the next page
See “Diagram of the engine control
Engine room on the
Engine control module (ECM) components” in the “Engine
left, near the battery
control”.
Safety airbag diagnostic Under the center “Diagram of components” in the
guard, shift lever
module (SDM) “Safety airbag”。
near
Engine room on the
left side, air “Diagram of components” in the
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
conditioning low- “Anti-lock brake system”
pressure filler below

9-263
第九章 车身和附件

9.17.2.2 Diagram of the data link connectors

9.17.3 The trouble diagnostic instrument not connected with the


power supply
9.17.3.1 Description of the circuit
The data link connector (DLC) provides operation power supply for diagnostic instrument at terminal 16
(positive voltage of the accumulator) and terminal 4 (grounding wire). DLC provides communication link at
terminal 7. The trouble diagnostic instrument can provided switch-on power supply upon shutdown.

9.17.3.2 Experimental description


The following numbers refer to step numbers in the diagnostic list.
1. 15A fuse F16 in the fuse box provides power supply for terminal 16 of the data link connector.
1. 2. If the accumulator positive voltage and grounding wire circuit of the data link connector are normal,
the trouble is surely caused by the trouble diagnostic instrument。

9.17.3.3 Trouble diagnostic instrument not energized


Step Remedies Yes No
Test whether the power supply terminal of
DLC is open circuit or short circuit to the “Corresponding diagnostic system
1 grounding wire or not. See “Circuit testing check of “Control module Step 2
and wire repair” in the “Wire system”. reference”
Find out the reason and repair it.
Test whether the grounding of
communication terminal 4 of the data link
“Corresponding diagnostic system
is open circuit or not. See “Circuit testing
2 check of “Control module Step 3
and wire repair” in the “Wire system”.
reference”
Find out the reason and repair it. Find out
the reason and repair it.
3 Check whether the connection between the “Corresponding diagnostic system Step 4
communication terminal 16 and 4 of the check of “Control module

9-264
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

data link and the trouble diagnostic


instrument is poor or not. These are reference”
included in step 1 and step 2.
The trouble diagnostic instrument may be “Corresponding diagnostic system
4 failed. See “Trouble diagnostic instrument check of “Control module -
user guide”. reference”

9.17.4 Description and operation


9.17.4.1 Description of the data link communication
Data link plug (DLC) for CAN network diagnosis, the use of UDS protocol。
The DLC also supplies power to the diagnostic instrument。
1 DLC supplies the battery voltage (B +) at terminal 16,
2 DLC terminal 4 is grounded

9.17.4.2 Description of the data link communication circuit


The UDS protocol allows the diagnostic tool to communicate with the following modules during diagnostics
and experimentation。
1 Airbag Diagnostic Module (SDM)
The UDS protocol is used to communicate with the SDM via terminal 7 of the data link。
2 LIN bus
LIN bus connection BCM, sunroof, main power window switch, trip recorder, combination switch, diagnostic
interface。
The fault diagnostic apparatus according to the UDS agreement, through the data link communication
terminal 15 and the above system correspondence。
3 CAN bus body
Body CAN bus with BCM, PEPS, instrument, MP5, panoramic parking system, air conditioning system,
diagnostic interface。
Fault diagnosis instrument according to UDS agreement, through the data link communication terminal 3
(CAN-H), terminal 11 (CAN-L) and the above system communication。
4 Chassis CAN bus
Chassis CAN bus connection BCM, ECU, ABS (ESP), EPS, EPB, diagnostic interface。
Fault diagnosis instrument according to UDS agreement, through the data link communication terminal 6
(CAN-H), terminal 14 (CAN-L) and the above system communication。

9.17.4.3 Diagnostic start point


Users can use the trouble diagnostic instrument to conduct the diagnostic system check of the problems
concerned by the customers to start the diagnosis and test procedures. The diagnostic system check will guide
correct steps of the various parts. If the trouble diagnostic instrument cannot turn on the power supply after
connected with the data link module, see the section “Trouble diagnostic instrument not switching on the
power supply”. If the trouble diagnostic instrument can turn on the power supply after connected with the
data link module but cannot communicate with these modules under ignition and engine shutdown state,
please check power supply and grounding connection of each module. If the power supply and grounding
connection are normal of the modules, the modules may be failed. Please restart after the module is changed
according to the disassembly and assembly steps。

9-265
第九章 车身和附件

9.18 Body Control System (BCM)


9.18.1 specification
9.18.1.1 Fastening Fastening Specification
Application Specification(N·m)

Body Control System (BCM) 3~5

9.18.2Diagram and wiring diagram


9.18.2.1 Diagram of the circuit

Body CAN chassis CAN

Left daytime running lights


Steering power supply / small lamp / Background
light Rear fog lamp relay Front fog lamp relay right daytime running
lights

Rear fog lamp RH


Front fog lamp relay RH
Rear fog lamp LH
Front fog lamp relay LH

Back Back Rear Rear


door door small small
small small lights left lights
License lights left lights right
Right
front Plate right
Left front Light
small
signal power small
lights
lights

9-266
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Backgrou Backgrou
nd light nd light
power Door
power
locks

Left rear
glass lift Rear External rear view mirror L
defrost
relay

Main power
window switch External rear view mirror R

down
up down up down up down up

Mechanical control
unlock
Blocking signal
Back door motor

Left front door Right front


glass lift motor Left rear door Right rear
door glass lift glass lift motor door glass lift
motor motor

Background light power


Background light power

buzzer

Right front glass lift


Right rear glass lift

Loudspeaker
relay Electric horn (treble)

Electric horn (bass)

Clock
From Fro Fro spring Left front latch
From Fro
the the m m m
power parki the the the
rear- ng par airb ele Right front latch
view brake kin ag ctr Electric
mirror switc g AC oni horn
adjust h bra U c switch Left rear latch
ment ke 26 ste
signal power
switch swi fee eri
2 feet tch t ng
col Right rear latch
um
n
loc

9-267
第九章 车身和附件

Low beam lights


High beam Headlight electric transfer motor

Background light power


High beam
Low beam lights Headlight adjustment switch

Left combination headlights


Right combination headlights

High beam lights LH


Low beam lights LH
Low beam lights RH High beam lights RH

Right From Left Right From


Back turn Left Rever rear rear brake
Rear Back Rear Front Left
door signa front sing gated gated light
turn door turn turn turn
turn l turn light switc switc switc
signal turn signal signal signa
signal signa switc h h h
lamp signal lamp lamp l
Lamp l h
R Lamp L R
R
L

Background light power


Rear brake
lights

Danger alarm switch


To the Combination Switch
Brake Lamp
brake
Relay
light
switch

Rear brake
Rear brake
lights R
lights L

Ca
me
to
the
fro
nt
rea
din
g
Back Front
Back High Luggage lam
door left Left Front Right Bac
door brake compartm p 4
brake gate Welco right Welco k-
brake lights ent lights fee
lights switch me gate me gat
lights t
R s light switch light ed
L
s swi
tch

9-268
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories
Chassi
Car
s CAN
body
CAN
Rearw
Front
iper
wipe
r

Combination Switch

Front Front Rear


wiper washing Rear washing
motor motor wiper motor
motor

signal power

9-269
第九章 车身和附件

9.18.3Location diagram of the components


9.18.3.1 Position of BCM

9-270
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.18.4Description and operation


9.18.4.1Description of the system functions
9.18.4.1.1Lighting systems and speakers
See Section 9.1 for system details
9.18.4.1.2Wiper system / scrubber system
For details of the system, see 9.2
9.18.4.1.3Central locking system
The following fault modes are set when the body line is normal and there is no radio
interference in the normal operation of the product
Door lock remote control assembly fault list
Phenomenon Reason Remedies
1.Remote Power supply is If the transmitter can function only when
control insufficient. closing to the vehicle, change the battery.
distance
1) The transmitter
battery is short of Change the battery.
electricity
2. The remote
2) The transmitter is
controller is failed Change the transmitter and restudy the code.
failed
3) The receiver is
Change the transmitter and restudy the code.
failed
3. Central
The receiver is damaged Change the transmitter and restudy the code.
controller is failed

Working principle
Car body CAN Chasis CAN

Door lock
The front door stopper LH

INMO coil The front door stopper RH

The rear door stopper LH


Key switch

The rear door stopper RH

Front left gate


switch Left rear gated switch

Mechanical control Back door micro switch


unlock unlock signal Rear gate switch
Right rear gated switch

Front right gate Back door motor


signal power switch

Central locking remote control function


9-271
第九章 车身和附件

1.Unlock:Pull out the key,press“ ”button,unlock four doors,BCM out of alert


state, turn signal flashing twice, to remind the successful unlock;At this point click
the back door of the micro-switch, BCM to the back door lock motor +12 V power supply,
back door open;
2.Atresia:The ignition key is not inserted and the five doors are closed,press“
”button,Five doors locked, turn signal flashing once, that lock success;If the key is
not pulled or one of the five doors is not closed in place, press the remote control
lock button, the buzzer beeps once, turn light blinks 3 times; so cycle until the lock
is successful (lock success, turn signal flash 1); Cycle operation to follow the
overheat protection function;
3.Look for cars:The ignition switch is in the OFF position,press“ ”button:When
the remote control to find the car, turn the lights to flash 15S; find the car, if the
remote control to solve the lock, PE unlock the lock (200mS); turn on the car, , 15S to
the time, BCM to exit the car search function; during the car, press the remote lockout
key to lift the car search function, press the remote unlock button to unlock the
action;
4.Tips lock: stop flame, pull out the key, close all the doors, more than 10 seconds is
not locked, turn signal flashing three times, the front cabin buzzer called 3;
5.Overheat lock protection Collision unlock: 10s in the mechanical control or remote
continuous open / close action 10 times, BCM prohibits the central control and remote
control to unlock, door lock motor into thermal lock protection function, Do not move
30s; but if the crash occurred within 30s, BCM does not follow the thermal protection,
emergency door lock motor unlock 1;
6.Automatic unlock: the speed is less than 3km / h, the ignition lock from the ON file
to the OFF file, the door lock motor is not protected, then automatically unlocked 1;
vehicle collision, the detection of collision signals automatically unlock the five door
locks; unlock at least 3 times (Interval time 2S);
7.Lock is not protected: the first time more than 15km / h, locked once, then manually
unlocked, no longer the second lock; lock in the unlocked state, the door lock is
unlocked, When the speed down to 15km / h or less, and once again more than 15km / h,
once again locked; automatic locking: pull out the key, five closed and locked in place,
press the remote control key (or PE door lock switch) unlock, 30S is not open Door,
automatically locked; received PEPS latch signal, automatically locked; (PEPS system
only);

Description of the control system functions


Function forbidden:
When the key is on“ON”, the receiving function of the remote controller will be forbidden.
Warning setting(press“ ”button):
Close all the doors properly and press key “ ”button,all the doors will be locked and the turn signal lamp flickers once. If the
door is not closed properly, when pressing key“ ”the turn signal lamp will flicker for 3 times and the door will be locked
automatically。
Locking distance of the remote control:
Remote control distance at open land under sunny weather:
Direction ≤30 m ≤40 m ≥50 m
Parallel to the ground and facing to
≥95% - -
the vehicle
Vertical to the ground and direction
≥80% - -
up
The above necessary climate condition shall be sunny day (without rain or snow) 0℃~60℃, or otherwise, the attenuation is allowed as
follows:
The remote control distance at open land under cloudy weather:

Direction ≤30 m ≤40 m ≥50 m


Parallel to the ground and facing to
≥85% - -
the vehicle

9-272
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Vertical to the ground and direction


≥70% - -
up
Unlocking distance of the remote controller:
The remote control distance at open land under sunny weather:
Direction ≤5 m ≤7 m ≥10 m
Parallel to the ground and facing to
≥95% ≥60% ≤0%
the vehicle
Vertical to the ground and direction
≥80% ≥45% ≤0%
up
The above necessary climate condition shall be sunny day (without rain or snow) 0℃~60℃, or otherwise, the attenuation is allowed as
follows:
The remote control distance at open land under cloudy weathe
Direction ≤5 m ≤7 m ≥10 m
Parallel to the ground and facing
≥85% ≥40% ≤0%
to the vehicle
Vertical to the ground and
≥70% ≥25% ≤0%
direction up

Cancel warning (press key “ ”):


When pressing key “ ”, the four doors are all unlocked and the turn signal lamp flickers once. If it is on warning state, cancel the warning
state.
When the matching is on warning state, if any of the doors is opened or the luggage box is opened, the emergency warning appears and
the turn signal lamp flickers for 30s. When touching it continuously, the warning appears continuously. Under warning state, press key “
”again to resume switch ON and cancel the emergency state to return to the anti-theft state. Under the emergency state, when pressing
key“ ”key, the emergency warning will be canceled and to exit anti-theft state.
Search function:

Press key to perform search function. The turn signal lamp will flickers for 15s.
It can be locked automatically when the speed is more than 10Km/h.
Turn on the ignition switch to close all the doors. When the speed is more than 10Km/h, the four doors will be locked automatically. If it
is paused but not stopped when driving, the door can be opened to get off and get on and then drive again. When the speed is more than
10km/h, it will be locked automatically. After the park is stopped, the ignition switch will be turned off to unlock automatically.
Secondary setting (automatically resuming anti-theft):
After entering warning state, if the transmitter is triggered mistakenly to cancel warning and the door is not opened within 30s, then it will
enter warning state again, the door will be locked and the turn signal lamp will flickers once.
Prompt warning:
Stop the engine and pull out the key. After all the doors are closed properly, if they are not locked within
10s, the turn signal lamp will flicker for 3 times (using locking as judgment standard but not warning).。

9.18.4.1.4Other
1.After the defrost
1.1Working principle
1.2Function Description
After the defrost and exterior mirrors heated by the relay control, the relay coil connected by
9-273
第九章 车身和附件

the BCM control. When the rear defrost switch is closed, the air conditioning controller
receives the defrost request signal and sends it to the BCM via the CAN bus. BCM receives
the defrost request signal, control relay coil is connected, then the rear defrost and exterior
mirrors heating work。
2.The electric exterior mirrors are folded
2.1Working principle
2.2Function Description
Automatic folding: power OFF, key pull out, remote lock, rearview mirror automatic folding;
manual folding: press the rearview mirror folding switch, rearview mirror automatic folding;
automatic folding: power off, remote control lock, automatic folding; ; Again press the
rearview mirror folding switch, rearview mirror automatically unfolds. Mechanical key
unlock / lock Outside mirrors do not fold automatically. When the electric folding mirror is
scratched or broken, it will cause the folder not to fold automatically. The rear view mirror
will shake and loosen, you need to manually fold the rearview mirror and press the manual
fold button several times. Click, the folder is reset and the rearview mirror returns to
normal。

9.18.5 Maintenance guidance


9.18.5.1 BCM change
Disassembly procedures
1 Remove the BCM screw with a short screwdriver。
2 Move the BCM and unplug the control box。

Assembly procedures
1 Connect the harness and BCM。
2 Secure the BCM screw with a short screwdriver.

9.19 Anti-collision radar


9.19.1Diagram
The anti-collision radar control module is now integrated in the MP5。
Car body CAN Car body CAN

Front camera Rear camera RH camera


LH camera

Background light power

9-274
AVM Controller
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Panoramic parking
Car body CAN

Background light power


Come from Reversing light
switch

Rear RH MID

Rear LH L
Rear RH R Rear LH MID

Reversing radar

9-275
第九章 车身和附件

Connect to MP5 Connect to speaker


Connect to Reversing radar controller
Reversing switch

Reverse image
Car body CAN

Come from Parking brake light switch Come from Reversing light switch

Background light power

Reverse image camera

Rear RH MID

Rear RH R Rear LH MID Rear LH L

9-276
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.19.2 Location diagram of the components


9.19.2.1 System arrangement

External rear view camera (left)

Front camera

Rearview camera

External rear view camera


(right)

AVM
controller
Ultrasonic sensors
9.19.2.2 AVM controller assembly
AVM controller assembly installed in the side of the skin after the subcutaneous segment
(right)

AVM controller
assembly

After the lateral circumflexion of


the inner subcutaneous (right)

9-277
第九章 车身和附件

9.19.2.3 Sensor assembly


It is mounted rear bumper.

Rear left sensor Rear the middle left sensor Rear the right sensor Rear right sensor

Relevant parameters
No-load mounting height of the sensor (relative to
560±10mm
the horizontal ground)
Distance between the four sensors Distance is 410mm、500mm、410mm
Sensor operation temperature -40℃~+85℃
Remark!
(1)Horizontal placement of the probe (relative to the horizontal ground)
(2)Install anti-collision radar detector security hole, the surrounding can
not have burr and to ensure uniform thickness of the arm bar
9.19.3Trouble diagnosis
9.19.3.1 Self-check of the anti-collision radar system
1 After the vehicle is engaged into reverse gear, the anti-collision radar can enter self-check state;
2 If the function of the four sensors is normal, the anti-collision radar gives out “Beep” sound for 0.5s;
3 If one or more of the four sensors fails, the buzzer beeps four times, the switching frequency is 2Hz, and
the time is 2s;
4 If the main sensor fails, the data can not be transferred to the MP5 or MP3;
9.19.3.3 Obstacle detection
After the self-test, the system enters the normal working state, that is, detection of
obstacle working condition。
Sensor Detection Buzzer on-off MP5 Display bar
orientation distance(D) frequency
Rear right and D<0.4 Long tweet Red
rear left 0.4≤D≤0.6 4Hz Yellow
sensors
After the middle D<0.4 Long tweet Red
right, right in 0.4≤D<1.0 4Hz Yellow
the left sensor 1.0≤D≤1.5 2Hz Green
9.19.3.4 Regular trouble check
1 Check whether the retrofit device affects the operation of the anti-collision radar
system;
2 (Such as collision or frictional damage) or conditions (such as the probe surface
plus spray paint), the system components are easy to find or see whether there is a

9-278
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

failure to cause significant damage (such as collision or friction damage);


3 If there is a problem with the wiring harness or the improper connection of the
connector, check the electrical connection first。

9.19.3.5 List of troubles of the anti-collision radar system


1. The anti-collision radar device does not give out sound.
2. During self-check, the system gives out “beep” sound for four times.
3. The anti-collision radar device gives out sound continuously.
4. The anti-collision radar device cannot correctly reflect the detection distance from the obstacle.
5. The anti-collision radar device gives out sound without obstacle.

9-279
第九章 车身和附件

9.19.4 Trouble diagnostic procedures of the anti-collision radar system


9.19.4.1 Anti-collision radar device not giving out sound
Step Remedies Yes No

Check whether the instrument fuse F21 is


1 Step 2 Change the fuse
connected properly or not.

Check whether the main sensor is good


2 Step3 Step10
(after the right sensor)
Check the
Check whetherthe meter to the
3 Step4 wiring and
reversing light switch line is good
plug
Check whetherthe reversing switch Check the
4 Step5
is good switch
Check whether the reversing light
switch is in good condition with Check the
5 Step6
the MP5 C12 lead wire harness wiring, plug
connector
Check for
Check whether the MP5 and the
short
6 sensor ground lead are in good Step7
circuit or
condition
open circuit
Replacement MP5 assembly, "Anti-collision radar
7 —
replacement is complete system self-test"

Repair the reverse power circuit, "Anti-collision radar


8 —
repair is complete system self-test"
Repair the ground wire of the
"Anti-collision radar
9 reversing lamp, whether the repairs —
system self-test"
are completed
Replace the main sensor, the "Anti-collision radar
10 —
replacement is complete system self-test"
9.19.4.2The system giving out “Beep” for four times during self-check
Step Remedies Yes No

Check whether the wiring circuit of the sensor


1 Step2 Step11
(left) is normal or not.

Check whether the sensor (left) has been


2 Step 4 Step 2
changed or not.

Check whether the sensor (left) has been "Anti-collision radar


3 —
changed or not. system self-test"
Check whether the wiring circuit of the
4 Step 5 Step 12
rearsensor (right) is normal or not.

Check whether the rearsensor (right) has been


5 Step 7 Step 5
changed or not.

9-280
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Check whether the rearsensor (right) has been "Anti-collision radar


6 —
changed or not. system self-test"

Check whetherthe middle left sensor


7 Step8 Step13
connection line is normal
Check whether the rear mid sensor (left) has
8 Step10 Step8
been changed or not.

Check whether the rear mid sensor (left) has "Anti-collision radar
9 —
been changed or not. system self-test"
Check whether the anti-collision radar "Anti-collision radar
10 —
controller assembly has been changed or not. system self-test"
Repairing the rearleft sensor line, is "Anti-collision radar
11 —
the repair done? system self-test"
Repairing the rearright sensor line, "Anti-collision radar
12 —
is the repair done? system self-test"

Repairing the line of rearleft sensor "Anti-collision radar


13 —
line, is the repair done? system self-test"

9.19.4.3 Anti-collision radar device giving out sound continuously

Step Remedies Yes No

Check whether the surface of each probe is


1 Step 2 Step 4
covered by sludge or other foreign matter or not.

Clean the surface of the sensor and check whether


2 Step 3 —
the cleaning is finished or not.

Check whether the anti-collision radar device "Anti-collision radar


3 Step 4
gives out sound normally or not. system self-test"

Replacement MP5 assembly, replacement is "Anti-collision radar


4 —
complete system self-test"

9.19.4.4Anti-collision radar device not reflecting correct obstacle distance


Step Remedies Yes No
Check whether the surface of each probe
1 is covered by sludge or other foreign Step 2 Step 3
matter or not.
Clean the surface of the sensor and check
2 Step 3 —
whether the cleaning is finished or not.
Approach an object to the sensor from far
to near within the valid range behind the
"Anti-collision radar
3 sensor and check whether the anti- Step 4
system self-test"
collision radar device can correctly reflect
the detection distance or not.
4 Keep one connection of the sensor and Step 7 Step 5
wire harness and disconnect another one.
Approach an object to the sensor from far

9-281
第九章 车身和附件

to near and check whether the anti-


collision radar device can correctly reflect
the detection distance or not.
Change the sensor and check whether the
5 Step 6 —
change is finished or not.
Repeat step 4 and check the anti-collision
6 radar device can correctly reflect the Step 7 Step 8
detection distance or not.
Test another sensor with same method and
check the anti-collision radar device can "Anti-collision radar
7 Step 8
correctly reflect the detection distance or system self-test"
not.
Check whether the anti-collision radar
"Anti-collision radar
8 controller assembly has been changed or —
system self-test"
not.

9.19.4.5Anti-collision radar device giving out sound without obstacle

Step Remedies Yes No


Check whether the height of the rear bumper
1 is lower than the height of vehicle under Step3 Step2
normal load condition or not.
Check whether the sensors (left and right)
are reassembled according to the requirement
2 and whether the sensor is affected by too Step4 Step5
large acting force of the rear bumper
assembly hole or not.
Repair the chassis or relevant components
and resume the height of the rear bumper "Anti-collision radar
3 —
under normal load condition, and check system self-test"
whether the repair is finished or not.
Clean the sensor mounting hole on the rear
"Anti-collision radar
4 bumper and sensor, and reassemble it and —
system self-test"
check the repair is finished or not.
Check whether the sensors are changed
5 Step7 —
orderly or not.

"Anti-collision radar
6 Replace the sensor in turn, and replace it —
system self-test"
Change the anti-collision radar controller
"Anti-collision radar
7 assembly and check whether the repair is —
system self-test"
finished or not.

9-282
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Side after the subcutaneous segment of Inner


9.19.5Maintenance guidance
Hexagon flange nuts
Mongolia (RH) 侧围后内蒙 六角法兰面螺母 9.19.5.1Replacement of AVM controller
皮下段 assembly
(右) Disassembly procedures
1 Remove the rear side under the inner panel body
(right);
2 Disconnect the electrical connector from the AVM
controller;
3 Remove the three mounting nuts from the side
AVM Controller
skin (right) and remove the AVM controller
AVM 控制器 assembly。
Assembly procedures
1 Install the three mounting nuts for the AVM
controller assembly;
2 Connect the AVM controller connector;
3 Install the rear side under the inner panel body
(right)。

Rear insurance body bar


后保险本体杠 9.19.5.2 How to change the sensor
超声波传感器
Ultrasonic sensors assembly
Disassembly procedures:
1. Disconnect the sensor and wire harness connector
from the rear bumper.
2. Disassemble the sensor assembly.
Assembly procedures:
1. Assemble the sensor assembly into the mounting
hole of the rear bumper after aligning with the
mounting hole.
Sensor bracket
传感器支架 2. Connect the sensor assembly。

9.19.5.3 MP5 replacement


See 9.15.5.4

9.19.6Description and operation


When the gearbox is engaged into the reverse “R” gear, the system enters self-check state.
9-283
第九章 车身和附件

If function of the two sensors is normal, the anti-collision radar device gives out “beep” once.
If the main sensor function is abnormal, the buzzer will not ring;
If the other sensors in addition to the main sensor has abnormal function, anti-collision radar device sound
four times.
Under normal conditions, the distance above the obstacle 150cm, the buzzer should not sound。
When you hear a long intermittent warning sound when the car is in reverse, the obstacle in the MP5 green
zone indicates that the sensor behind your car is within 100cm to 150cm of the obstacle。
When you hear a short intermittent warning sound in the reverse, obstructions in the MP5 yellow area,
indicating that the sensor after your car from the barrier has entered the 40 cm ~ 100cm range。
When you hear a long beeping sound when reversing, obstacles in the MP5 red zone, indicating that your car
after the sensor has entered the barrier 0 cm ~ 40cm range。

Note: In the Changming District (0 cm ~ 40cm) when there is an obstacle reversing, will lead to
inaccurate test range. When the obstacle into the 40cm, before the exit 60cm are long sound。

 Note:
 1. During reversing, use 5km/h or lower speed for reverse to ensure safety and system testing time.
 2. During reversing, stop operation upon hearing long warning sound to avoid colliding obstacle
behind the vehicle.
 3. Don't directly wash the sensor with powerful knock or high pressure water gun to avoid damage of
the sensor.
 4. Snow, sludge and water drop etc attached on the sensor may cause mistaken operation.
The following abnormal place or obstacle may cause unable detection or poor detection:
1. Wire netting or rope etc small object
2. Driving in grass or uneven road pavement
3. Cotton or material that the surface is easy to absorb sound wave
4. Foreign matter attached on the sensor surface
5. Ultrasonic noise with same frequency, metal noise and high pressure gas emission noise
6. Obstacle with acute angle reflector or conical object

9-284
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.20 Skylights
9.20.1 specification
9.20.1.1 Fastener torque

Types of
bolt:(N·m) Nuts:(N·m)
position

Skylight body assembly 4~5 4~5

9.20.2 Schematic and circuit diagrams

Skylight

Skylight
controller

9.20.3Component view
9-285
第九章 车身和附件

9.20.3.1 Skylight assembly

Icon:
1Lining lining assembly 2 Skylight body assembly
3 Skylight motor assembly4 Skylight glass assembly
5 Sunroof sun visor assembly

9-286
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Disassembly procedures
  Note: Disconnect the battery negative
terminal before operation. Do not operate the
battery in order to avoid the battery short-
circuit causing personal injury or vehicle
damage.
1 Remove the roof liner. See "Interior trim" in
"Roof lining"。
2 Disconnect the sunroof assembly connector。
3 Remove the sunroof assembly fixing bolts and
nuts。
4 Remove the sunroof assembly。

Assembly procedures
1 Attach the sunroof assembly to the body
cover。
2 Tighten the skylight with bolts and nuts。
3 Plug in the sunroof assembly electrical
connectors。
4 Install the roof liner. See "Interior trim" in
"Roof lining"。

9.20.4Service Guide
9.20.4.1 Skylight assembly
replacement
9-287
第九章 车身和附件

9.20.4Skylight symptoms and diagnostic procedures and repair


order

Symptoms and diagnosis of maintenance table


symptom Diagnostic procedures and maintenance procedures
1. Check BCM power supply and ground circuit.
2. Check sunroof motor assembly power and ground
Skylights do not work circuit.
3. Check the sunroof switch circuit 3 (ignition switch to
"ON" file, detect whether the sunroof controller pin 4
voltage is 12V).
4. Replace the sunroof motor assembly
The skylight can not perform an upward 1. Check the sunroof switch circuit 1 (using the
tilt and a sliding close multimeter to check whether the sunroof controller pin 5
and 8 are connected).
Skylights can not perform down and 1. Check the sunroof switch circuit 2 (using the
slide open multimeter to check whether the sunroof controller pin 5
and 9 are connected).
The motor can not be stopped when the 1. Check the initialization procedure.
sunroof is fully open or fully closed 2. The battery power 30S and then power.
3. Replace the sunroof motor assembly
Skylight does not perform interrupt 1. Replace the sunroof motor assembly
detection

9.20.5Maintenance and maintenance of electric sunroof

Through the regular maintenance and repair, can be more comfortable and effective
use of electric sunroof, and as far as possible to extend the life of the skylight:
1. Use a period of time, the skylight of the slide, the gap will generally have a lot of sand deposition, such
as irregular cleaning, it will wear parts of the skylight. Should be regularly cleaned around the slide, to
avoid sand deposition, extending the life of the roof seal. Generally in the use of 2 to 3 months, the sealing
tape around the slide with a wet cotton wrapped in a screwdriver at the top stained with cleaning water,
into the clean, slide the channel to be wiped clean evenly after a little grease, sealant And the body contact
with the Department of smear seal special fluorine oil, so you can extend the life of the skylight seals and
slideways.
2. Open the skylight should pay attention to the roof before the obstruction of the obstruction of the
operation of the skylight glass.
3. The biggest concern is the use of skylights leaks, leaking, the correct use and maintenance of skylights
can effectively prevent leakage. Before entering the rainy season, in addition to cleaning the slide, the seal
in the cracks in the dust, but also in the seal and other plastic parts sprayed with a little plastic protective
agent (fluoride oil) or talc.
4. Winter in the snow or after washing, skylight glass and seal may be frozen, then if forced open the
skylight, easy to make the sunroof motor and seal damage. The correct approach is, after the snow or car
wash, open the skylight, dry the edge of the residual moisture, or to be confirmed inside the car after the
thaw temperature rise open the sunroof. In addition, the rain is strictly prohibited to open the skylight, the
rain, driving to the water roughly dry (about ten minutes) and then open the skylight, or directly with a dry
cloth to the glass and the water between the frame dry. This avoids water leakage caused by this.
5. In extremely bumpy road is best not to fully open the skylight, or may be due to skylights and slide
between the vibration caused by too much deformation or even related parts of the motor damage.
6. When using the electric sunroof, be sure to pay special attention to the use of control switches, because
many skylights are due to failure caused by improper use.
7. Skylight glass design is isolated from heat and UV protection function, please use a soft cloth and

9-288
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

special cleaning agent, do not use a viscous cleaning agent cleaning. , Generally clean at least once a
month.
8. Children are prohibited to skylights when the "toy", if allowed to repeatedly open them to open, in
addition to power, easy to damage the motor, there is the risk of being pinch.
9. If there is oil pollution to the roof sealant, please clean up in time to avoid aging and weaken the sealing
performance of the skylight.
10. Under the sunroof, it is forbidden to use the grease (such as butter) for the installation of the sewer pipe
when the water pipe part is under maintenance. The pipe of the sewer pipe may cause the risk of cracking
after contact with the butter.
11. Sewer inside or under the water plug, the water did not go to place, it will leak: If the sewer or clogged
the outlet, the water will be from the skylight around the junction with the sewer to the vehicle overflow;
Mouth clogging, water will be from the bottom of the water pipe and the junction of overflow in the trunk.
So usually should always check the sunroof under the water pipes and the outlet, the timely removal of
flying into the small leaves, small grass and small debris to prevent clogging the drain. Once the drainage
pipe blocked, in addition to the repair shop in time to deal with, but also the skylight fully open, find a
slightly flexible network cable, from the sink four corners of the sink hole down to clear, can also be used
high-pressure gas blowing In addition to blockage.
12. Every year should be a certain degree of maintenance, into the exposure should be sprayed before the
rubber and plastic protective agent; into the winter before the necessary lubrication parts
13. In any case, the sunroof power failure will cause the use of functional skylights appear, you should first
re-initialized after the sunroof use
14. Skylight in the use of a period of time, moving the glass assembly and there will be some loose
between the skeleton, if not timely maintenance, then, before and after the glass assembly, left and right
position will be a certain change in serious cases will affect Skylight sealing, or even because of the
location of the glass can not be closed or open the skylight of the action, seriously affecting the vehicle
safety and sealing; in order to avoid similar problems occur, you need regular skylight glass assembly for a
certain debugging And maintenance. Should be in regular maintenance of the vehicle or when a similar
problem occurs, check the installation of the four bolts of glass, its hard to lock, try to run after use.

9-289
第九章 车身和附件

9.21 ESP system


9.21.1 specification
9.21.1.1 Fastener torque

Application specification(N·m)
PEPS controller 4~5
GPS antenna 4~5

9.21.2 Schematic and circuit diagrams

ACC/IG2 Relay Constant power 

Indoor wireless
IG2 Relay Constant power  rear row LH

Indoor wireless
Clutch low switch Hand box
Indoor wireless
Indoor wireless
Hand box ESCL Relays
rear row RH

Outdoor antenna REAR Electronic steering


Outdoor antenna FR Indoor antenna rear column lock
DOOR
RH DOOR row RH
Start switch Outdoor antenna FR
Backlight indicator LH DOOR
Startswitch power Outdoor antenna
OutdoorFR
antenna REAR Back door micro
Outdoor antenna FR RH DOOR DOOR Indoor antenna rear switch
supply ACC
LH DOOR row RH
indicator
Backlight indicator
Startswitch power
supply ON
indicator

Left front door request Right front door


switch request switch

9-290
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

9.21.3 ESP system fault diagnosis procedures


9.21.3.1 Keyless entry system does not work

Step Remedies Yes No


Replacement
1 Checkif the remote control battery is empty Step 2
battery
Keep the key as close to the vehicle as possible and The repair is
2 Step 3
check that it is accessible complete
Respectively, check the PEPS controller A2, A13,
A1, A12 pin and left and right front door antenna Check the wiring as
3 Step 4
connection is good, A4, A15, pin and back door well as the plug
antenna connection is good
Replacement
4 Check the cab insurance ISB1, ISB2, IF29 is intact Step 5
insurance
Check the wiring and
5 Check front door, back door wiring harness is good Step 6
ground
Troubleshoot the
Replace the
surrounding
6 Check the PEPS controller for damage PEPS
electromagnetic
controller
interference

9.21.3.2 Keyless start system does not work


Step Remedies Yes No

Replacement
1 Check if the remote control battery is empty Step 2
battery
Keep the key as close as possible to the center The repair is
2 Step 3
control box and check that it can be started complete
Turn off the external electronic equipment inside The repair is
3 Step 4
the car, check whether it can start complete
Check whether the one-button start button is Check the wiring and
4 Step 5
connected to the PEPS controller plug-ins
Replace the
Diagnosis EFI system
5 Check the PEPS controller for damage PEPS
is faulty
controller

9-291
第九章 车身和附件

9.22 Electrical system diagnostic code list


9.22.1 Subsystem Diagnostic Code
Air conditioning system diagnostic code (AC DC)
Diagnostic code Fault code description Maintenance recommendations
U007300 The bus is off Check the bus transceiver to detect CAN H,
CAN L is normal
U010087 EMS is missing Check the EMS node status
U012187 ABS is missing Check the ABS node status
U014087 BCM is missing Check BCM node status
U021487 PEPS is missing Check the PEPS node status
U018687 RRM is missing Check the RRM node status
B111717 The battery voltage is Check the battery status
overvoltage
B111716 Battery voltage undervoltage Check the battery status
B170171 Mixed wind motor stall Check the hybrid motor
B170112 The mixed wind motor Check the feedback harness
feedback is short to the power
supply
B170111 Mixed wind motor feedback to Check the feedback harness
ground short circuit
B170371 Mode damper motor stalled Check the mode door motor
B170312 Mode damper Motor feedback Check the feedback harness
Short circuit to power supply
B170311 Mode damper Motor feedback Check the feedback harness
Short to ground
B170411 The interior temperature sensor Check the sensor input harness
is shorted to ground
B170415 The interior temperature sensor Check the sensor input harness
is shorted to the power supply
B170514 The sun sensor is shorted to Check the sensor input harness
ground
B170512 The sunny sensor is shorted to Check the sensor input harness
the power supply
B170611 The evaporator temperature Check the sensor input harness
sensor is shorted to ground
B170615 The evaporator temperature Check the sensor input harness
sensor is shorted to the power
supply
B170711 The ambient temperature sensor Check the sensor input harness
is shorted to ground
B170715 The ambient temperature sensor Check the sensor input harness
is shorted to the power supply
B170811 5V output short to ground Check the 5V output harness
B170A92 Blower feedback is abnormal Check the blower status

Panorama Parking Diagnostic Code (AVM DTC)


Diagnostic code Fault code description Maintenance recommendations
Main power supply low voltage
B140001 Check the power supply is normal
fault
B140002 Front camera head open circuit fault Check the front camera
B140003 After the camera open circuit Check the rear camera

9-292
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

failure
B140004 Left camera open circuit fault Check the left camera
B140005 Right camera open circuit fault Check the right camera
B140006 Front camera short-circuit fault Check the front camera
B140007 After the camera short circuit fault Check the rear camera
B140008 Left camera short circuit fault Check the left camera
B140009 Right camera short circuit fault Check the right camera
B14000A DSP power supply failure Check the DSP power supply is normal
U1A0001 DSP communication failure Replace the host
Main power supply high voltage
U018687 Check the power supply is normal
fault
1, check the line
U014087 BCM communication failure
2, check the BCM, see whether to send a message
1, check the line
U007300 CAN bus failure 2, check the CAN bus, see whether to send or
receive messages
B14000B EEPROM failure Replace the host
1, check the line
U012187 ABS communication failure
2, check the ABS, see whether to send a message
1, check the line
U010187 TCU CVT communication failure 2, check the TCT and CVT, see whether to send a
message
1, check the line
U010287 SAS communication failure
2, check the SAS, see whether to send a message

Body Controller Diagnostic Code (BCM DTC)


Diagnostic code Fault code description Maintenance recommendations
B111717 The battery voltage is too high Detection of batteries
B111716 The battery voltage is too low Detection of batteries
B102011 The left turn signal line is shorted Check the left turn signal line
B102013 The left turn signal line is open Check the left turn signal line
B102111 The right turn signal line is shorted Check the right turn signal line
B102113 The right turn signal line is open Check right turn signal line
Replace the door lock or check the door lock status
B104424 Unlock the door lock failure
line
Replace the door lock or check the door lock status
B104423 Door lock failure
line
The PT-CAN segment bus is shut
U007288 Detection of CAN bus
down
The Body-CAN segment bus is shut
U007388 Detection of CAN bus
down
U007487 PT-CAN Gateway CAN NOACK Detection of CAN bus
Body-CAN Gateway CAN
U007587 Detection of CAN bus
NOACK
U100687 Body-CAN segment limp home Detection of CAN bus
U120387 Lin no communication Device is online or LIN bus circuit
Communication with the EMS is
U010087 Detection of CAN bus, testing EMS components
lost
Detection of CAN bus, detection of ABS
U012187 Communication is lost with ABS
components
Detection of CAN bus, detection of EPS
U013187 Communication is lost with EPS
components
U012887 Loss of communication with the Detection of CAN bus, EPB detection components
9-293
第九章 车身和附件

EPB
Loss of communication with the
U010187 Detection of CAN bus, detection TCU components
TCU
U015587 Communication with the IC is lost CAN bus detection, detection IC components
Detection of CAN bus, detection of AC
U011687 Communication is lost with the AC
components
U012087 Loss of communication with PEPS Detection of CAN bus, detection PEPS components
Loss of communication with the
U014187 CAN bus detection, testing ESP components
ESP
U012687 Loss of communication with SAS CAN bus detection, testing SAS components
B101449 Skylight internal fault Detection of skylights
B101596 Skylight motor failure Detection of sunroof motor
Skylight LIN bus communication
B101683 Detection skylight LIN bus
failure
Left front window switch
B101796 Check the left front window switch
malfunction
The main driving door and window
Detection of the main driving window switch LIN
B101B96 switch LIN bus communication
bus
failure
B101C96 Failure of headlight switch Detection of lights switch
B101D96 The wiper switch is faulty Check the wiper switch
Combination switch LIN bus
B101E96 Detection of combined switch LIN bus
communication failed
B12E096 Anti-theft coil failure Check if the coil connector is loose
Key authentication data not Check whether the key chip within the
B12E131
received communication distance of 3cm coil
B12E262 Key key error Replace the key with a valid key
B12E362 EMS key error Replace the ECU with a legal key
U250387 EMS No authentication request Troubleshoot ECU
Window anti-clamp LIN bus
B131096 Detection window anti-clamp LIN bus
communication failure
The window anti-seize module
B13111C Check the battery
voltage is abnormal
The front left window button is
B131211 Check the left front window button
shorted
B131311 Right front window button shorted Check the right front window button
The left rear window button is
B131411 Check the left rear window button
shorted
B131511 Right rear window button shorted Check the rear right window button
Motor output of left front window
B13161C Check the left front window motor
is faulty
Right front window motor output
B13171C Check the right front window motor
fault
Motor output of left rear window is
B13181C Check the left rear window motor
faulty
Right rear window motor output
B13191C Check right rear window motor
fault
Left front window resistance is too
B131A96 Check the left front window
large
Right front window resistance is too
B131B96 Check the right front window
large
Left rear window resistance is too
B131C96 Check the left rear window
large

9-294
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Right rear window resistance is too


B131D96 Check right rear window
large
Left front motor position signal
B132096 Check the left front window motor
error
Right front motor position signal
B132196 Check the right front window motor
error
B132296 Left motor position signal error Check the left rear window motor
B132396 Right Motor position signal error Check right rear window motor
Internal anti-skid controller window
B132496 Check the window anti-seize controller
fault
Sunlight rain sensor LIN bus
B141096 Monitoring Sunshine Rain Sensor LIN bus
communication failure

Meter Diagnostic Code (IC DTC)


Diagnostic code Fault code description Maintenance recommendations
U007300 Controller Bus Off /
U010087 Communication failure with EMS /
U013187 Communication failure with UPS /
U010187 Communication failure with ECU /
U012187 Communication failure with ABS /
U014087 Communication with BCM failed /
U018687 Communication with ARM failed /
U021487 Communication failure with GPS /
U012887 Communication failure with ABB /
U016487 Communication failure with UC /
The battery voltage is
B111717 /
overvoltage
B111716 Battery voltage undervoltage /
U014187 Communication with ASP failed /

Keyless entry Startup System Diagnostic Code (PEPS DTC)


Diagnostic code Fault code description Maintenance recommendations
Pin code unprogrammed download
B122051 or programming download Please re-program the download PIN to the ECU
unsuccessful
B122446 EEPROM error Check the GPS module or the battery voltage
B120000 A key to start switch stuck Check the one-button start switch button
The left front door antenna is Check the left front door antenna connector or
B123011
shorted to ground replace the antenna test
The left front door antenna is Check the left front door antenna connector or
B123012
shorted to the power supply replace the antenna test
Check the left front door antenna connector or
B123013 The left front door antenna is open
replace the antenna test
The right front door antenna is Check the right front door antenna connector or
B123111
shorted to ground replace the antenna test
The right front door antenna is Check the right front door antenna connector or
B123112
shorted to the power supply replace the antenna test
Check the right front door antenna connector or
B123113 The front right antenna is open
replace the antenna test
The rear right seat antenna is Check rear right seat antenna connector terminal or
B123211
shorted to ground replace antenna test
B123212 The rear right seat antenna is Check rear right seat antenna connector terminal or

9-295
第九章 车身和附件

shorted to the power supply replace antenna test


Check rear right seat antenna connector terminal or
B123213 Rear right seat antenna opens
replace antenna test
Hand-box antenna is shorted to Check the manual box antenna connector or replace
B123411
ground the antenna test
The handbox antenna is shorted to Check the manual box antenna connector or replace
B123412
the power supply the antenna test
Check the manual box antenna connector or replace
B123413 Hand box antenna open
the antenna test
The rear seat antenna is shorted to Check rear left-seat antenna connector terminal or
B123511
ground replace the antenna test
The rear left seat is shorted to the Check rear left-seat antenna connector terminal or
B123512
power supply replace the antenna test
Check rear left-seat antenna connector terminal or
B123513 The rear seat antenna is open
replace the antenna test
The tailgate antenna is shorted to Check the rear door antenna connector or replace
B123611
ground the antenna test
The tailgate antenna is shorted to Check the rear door antenna connector or replace
B123612
the power supply the antenna test
Check the rear door antenna connector or replace
B123613 The tailgate antenna is open
the antenna test
Check one of the start switch immo antenna
B123A13 The mimo antenna is open terminals or replace the one key start switch
assembly
Mimo antenna open circuit short Check the rear door antenna connector or replace
B123A96
circuit or IC failure the antenna test
The ACC relay is shorted to the
B124612 Check the ACC relay and connector terminals
power supply
The ACC relay is shorted to ground
B124614 Check the ACC relay and connector terminals
or open
ACC relay terminal is disconnected
B124696 Check the ACC relay and connector terminals
or internal relay fault
The IG1 relay is shorted to the
B124712 Check the IG1 relay and connector terminals
power supply
The IG1 relay is shorted to ground
B124714 Check the IG1 relay and connector terminals
or open
IG1 Relay terminal is disconnected
B124796 Check the IG1 relay and connector terminals
or internal relay is faulty
The IG2 relay is shorted to the
B124812 Check the IG2 relay and connector terminals
power supply
The IG2 relay is shorted to ground
B124814 Check the IG2 relay and connector terminals
or open
IG2 Relay terminal is disconnected
B124896 Check the IG2 relay and connector terminals
or internal relay is faulty
B111716 The battery voltage is too low Check the battery voltage
B111717 The battery voltage is too high Check the battery voltage
U007300 CAN bus communication failure CAN bus connection fault or PEPS fault
U100587 CAN network limp indication CAN bus connection fault or PEPS fault
U120387 LIN bus communication failure LIN bus connection fault or PEPS fault
U012187 Loses communication with the ABS Detection ABS control module
U010187 Lost communication with TCM Detection ECU control module
U010087 Lost communication with EMS Detection of EMS control module
U014087 Lost communication with PCM Detection BCM control module

9-296
Chapter 9 – Vehicle Body and Accessories

Check the engine control module or the


U180000 Engine control module key error
downloaded product
Electronic steering column lock Check the sub-steering column lock control module
U180001
control module key error or the downloaded PIN
U180002 Engine start time-out Check the engine control module
Check the electronic steering column lock control
GPS and electronic steering column
U180003 module or replace the electronic steering column
lock communication failure
lock control module test
Check the electronic steering column lock control
Electronic steering column lock
U180004 module or replace the electronic steering column
failure
lock control module test

Sound System Diagnostic Code (RRM DTC)


Diagnostic code Fault code description Maintenance recommendations
The battery voltage is below the
B111716 Check the power supply
critical value
The battery voltage is above the
B111717 Check the power supply
critical value
1. Check the wire
The navigation box does not start
B11C111 2. Check whether the navigation box to send
properly
information;
Check the bus transceiver to detect CAN H, CAN L
U007300 The CAN bus is off
is normal
1. Check the wire
U115987 Lost communication with AVM
2. Check whether the AVM sends a message;
1. Check the wire
U014087 Lost communication with TCM
2. Check whether the BCM sends a message;
1. Check the wire
U012187 Lost communication with the ABS
2. Check whether ABS sends a message;
1. Check the wire
U010187 Lost communication with TCM
2. Check whether TCP sends a message;
1. Check the wire
U016487 Lost communication with the AC
2. Check whether AD sends a message;
1. Check the wire
U010287 Lost communication with SAS
2. Check whether JS sends a message;

9-297

You might also like